Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
2014 Fire Station 93 HVAC System Upgrade_201404091404503246
GE OF 041r 0 Village of Oak Brook Fire Station #93 HVAC System Upgrade Bid Package `2 February 2014 oOUNY�' Section A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. if Table of Contents Notice to Bidders Bid Instructions Specifications General Conditions Statement of Contractor's Qualifications References Bid Certification Contract Contract Bond Section A Notice to Bidders Posted on the Village Website and in the Daily Herald on February 5, 2014 NOTICE TO BIDDERS VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK The Village of Oak Brook will receive bids for: Village of Oak Brook Fire Station # 93 HVAC System Upgrade A Pre -Bid ineet111,111411 be held at 10:00 a.m. on Wednesday, Februa 12 2014 at the Village of Oak Brook Fire Station #93, 725 Enterprise Drive., Oak Brook, Illinois 60523, Prospective bidders must be at Fire Station #93 at 10:00 a.m. to be considered an attendee. Attendance at this meeting is mandatory.. The purpose of the meeting is to give all prospective bidders the opportunity to view and inspect the site. Any questions or concerns can be addressed at this time. Sealed bids will be received by Rania Serences, Senior Purchasing Assistant, Village of Oak Brook, until Wednesday, February 19, 11:00 A.M., prevailing time, and publicly opened in the Samuel E. Dean Board Room, located in the Butler Government Center, 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois 60523. Bids received after this time will not be considered and will be returned unopened. Bid Packages, including plans and specifications, are on file at the Oak Brook Village Hall, 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois 60523. Copies of the Bid Package may be obtained by depositing a non-refundable fee of Twenty -Five Dollars ($25.00). No bid shall be withdrawn after opening of bids without the consent of the Village of Oak Brook for a period of ninety (90) days after the scheduled time of opening bids. The informalities o Villageof bidding and to accept he bid deemed most advantageous t it. Oak Brook reserves the right to reject any or all bids and waive any Charlotte K. Pruss Village Clerk 2. 0 9 5. COSTS: The undersigned contractor hereby affirms and states the prices quoted herein constitute the total cost to the Village for all work involved in the respective items and that this cost also includes all insurance, royalties, transportation charges, use of all tools and equipment, superintendence, overhead expense, all profits and all other work, services and conditions necessarily involved in the work to be done and materials to be furnished in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents considered severally and collectively. This bid shall be held valid for a period of ninety (90) days after the bid due date. INSTRUCTIONS The undersigned contractor shall comply with all provisions and requirements of this Bid Package. TIME OF COMPLETION: The undersigned affirms and declares that if awarded the contract for this work he will completely perform said contract in strict accordance with its terms and conditions 90 days after the start of the project, unless additiona granted by the Village in accordance with the provisions of the Should the contractor fail to complete the work by said date or within time as may have been allowed, the contractor shall be liable to th amount set forth in the specifications. BID GUARANTEE: NIA Page 2 time shall be specifications. such extended Village in the Section B Bid Village of Oak Brook Fire Station #93 HVAC System Upgrade 1. COST OF WORK: The undersigned, acting for and on behalf of contractor and having familiarized himself with conditions affecting the cost of the work and its performance and having carefully examined and fully understood the entire bid package, hereby affirms and agrees to enter into a contract with the Village of Oak Brook, Oak Brook, IL. To provide all supervision, labor, material, equipment and all other expense items to completely perform the work covered by the specifications in this Bid Package. Page 1 Section A Notice to Bidders Posted on the Village Website and in the Daily Herald on February 5, 2014 NOTICE TO BIDDERS VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK The Village of Oak Brook will receive bids for: Village of Oak Brook Fire Station # 93 HVAC System Upgrade A Pre Bid meeting will be held at 10.00 a.m. on Wednesday February 12, 2014 at the Village of Oak Brook Fire Station #93, 725 Enterprise Drive., Oak Brook, Illinois 60523, Prospective bidders must be at Fire Station #93 at 10:00 a.m. to be considered an attendee. Attendance at this meeting is mandatory. The purpose of the meeting is to give all prospective bidders the opportunity to view and inspect the site. Any questions or concerns can be addressed at this time. Sealed bids will be received by Rania Serences, Senior Purchasing Assistant,. Village of Oak Brook, until Wednesday, February 19, 11:00 A.M., prevailing time, and publicly opened in the Samuel E. Dean Board Room, located in the Butler Government Center, 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois 60523. Bids received after this time will not be considered and will be returned unopened. Bid Packages, including plans and specifications, are on file at the Oak Brook Village Hall, 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois 60523. Copies of the Bid Package may be obtained by depositing a non-refundable fee of Twenty -Five Dollars ($25.00). No bid shall be withdrawn after opening of bids without the consent of the Village of Oak Brook for a period of ninety (90) days after the scheduled time of opening bids. The Village of Oak Brook reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informalities in bidding and to accept the bid deemed most advantageous to it. Charlotte K. Pruss Village Clerk Firm yGGICJJ. „' - j City, State, ZIP: Name Printed: U) Title: VF hi% ChP€R A 116 Telephone: 697 37G� Date: If a Corporation: ATTEST: becreiary Page 3 ,. �' �ca�, z �,� .. �# ,,. N SECTION 00 41 13 BID FORM - STIPULATED SUM SINGLE CONTRACT Project: VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK FIRE STATION NO. 93 - HVAC SYSTEM UPGRADE 725 ENTERPRISE DRIVE OAK BROOK, ILLINOIS 60523 Bid to: VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK 1200 OAK BROOK ROAD OAK BROOK, ILLINOIS 60523 Bid from: Corporate Name: M6GNPtAVCAL- CoNT2PCTOQS Address: 3(,a KGIA7 AVE• ELkGCeaoue VUb.\ IL Telephone No.: 9�Ei' 3 C"� l --7 g 9 q Fax No.: Contact Person: �L l zo SSE 1.01 ACCEPTANCE The undersigned Bidder agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an agreement with the Owner, in the form included in the Bidding Documents, to perform and furnish the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents for the Bid Price and within the Bid times indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 1.02 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS In submitting this Bid, the Bidder represents that: A. This Bid will remain open for acceptance for a period of 90 days from the Bid opening date; B. The Owner has the right to reject this Bid; C. The Bidder accepts the provisions of the Instructions and Supplementary Instructions to Bidders regarding the disposition of the Bid; nt and D. The Bidder Reuiremegrees to nu n and submit the Agreeme the Bidding Requirements ts within15 days after the Owner's oNoti ther ce of Award; ocuments equired by a E. The Bidder has examined the complete set of Bidding Documents; F. The Bidder has visited the site and become familiar with the general, local, and site 00 41 13 - 1 SECTION 00 41 13 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 BID FORM - STIPULATED SUM Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved '71 conditions; G. The Bidder is familiar with Federal, State and Local Laws and Regulations; H. The Bidder has correlated the information known to the Bidder; information and observations obtained from visits to the site, reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents and additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Bidding Documents; I. This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of an undisclosed person, firm, or corporation and is not submitted in conformity with an Agreement or rules or group, association, organization, or corporation; irectl induce or citd another dder to submit J false ors hama Bid; olughtrectlybyrcollusionyto obta in d for tselfean advantage a Theider hs e over another Bidder or over the Owner; K. The Bidder has received the following Addenda, receipt of which is hereby acknowledged: l 1. Addendum No. N A Date N I 2. Addendum No. Date 3. Addendum No. Date The Bidder understands that, in submitting this Bid, he waives all right to plead any misunderstandings regarding the foregoing. 1.03 SINGLE CONTRACT - BASE BID PRICE: A. Refer to Section 01 10 00 - Summary. B. The Bidder will complete the Work of the Project in accordance with the Contract Documents for the following price: Stipulated Sum Bid Price: n8 9oo,ob (Use Numerals) b � �l u>`tot?�o SEveN'f� EtirNl� "[jr{005�� NitSE F)UNP2�"� (Use Words) 6 1.04 ALTERNATES A. The Bidder has attached Document 00 43 23 - Bid Form Supplement -Alternates with this Bid. Refer to Section 01 23 00 - Alternates for description of alternates. 00 41 13 - 2 SECTION 00 41 13 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 - BID FORM - STIPULATED SUM Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved I 1.05 SIGNATURES p A. Respectfully submitted this It day of FE��U�,2014. B. Type of Firm: (check one) Individual Partnership Corporation Joint Venture C. Corporate Seal: D. Full name of firm: C%ROSSE H E. Authorized Signing Officer: Title: ?"v (SEAL) L cc�N'CiZl�eTpl2 S or iLLIIIAOLs, (NG. F. Authorized Signing Officer: Title: VP eF 6? 0 END OF DOCUMENT PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 0041 13 -3 Copyrighi© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 00 41 13 BID FORM- STIPULATED SUM SECTION 00 43 23 ALTERNATES FORM 1.01 PARTICULARS A. The following is the list of Alternates referenced in the bid submitted by: (Bidder)--61RbSSC-- FCNAMI(-t'1L CavT-A+C-T-012S Dated 2-)19 1 Zc> y and which is an integral part of the Bid Form. 1.02 ALTERNATES LIST A. The following amounts shall be added to or deducted from the Bid Amount. Refer to Section 01 23 00 - Alternates: Schedule of Alternates. 1. Alternate # ircle One) 1 (A ) (Deduct) $ ' 1� 2. Alternate # (Ad . (Deduct) $ -�). boo, dC7 - 3. Alternate # _ (Add) (Deduct) $ 4. Alternate # _ (Add) (Deduct) $ 5. Alternate # _ (Add) (Deduct) $ b. Alternate # _ (Add) (Deduct) $ 7. Alternate # _ (Add) (Deduct) $ 8. Alternate # _ (Add) (Deduct) $. 9. Alternate # (Add) (Deduct) $ 10. Alternate # (Add) (Deduct) $ END OF DOCUMENT PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 0043 23- 1 SECTION 00 43 23, ALTERNATES FORM CopyrightO 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Righis Reserved 7 Q �ol 0 cfJ q r'1 � W Q 9 �,: i 4:'• HEATING VENTILATING • AIR CONDITIONING ME CHANICAL CONTRA oTLORS ;RO SSE 0 E, ILLINOIS 60007 KENT AVENUE • ELK GROVE VILLAGWWW GROSS-EMECHANICAL.COM 47) 364-7899 • FAX (847) 364-7972 February 19, 2014 RE: VOLUNTARY ALTERNATES VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK FIRE STATION #93 VOLUNTARY ALTERNATE #1 Carrier Equipment Option provide a Carrier roof top unit instead of the specified manufacturers Total DEDUCT to p for the sum of FIVE THOUSAND dollars ($59000-00). Thank you for your consideration, and please do not hesitate to call if you have ani' questions. Respectfully submitted, OROSSE MECHANICAL CONTRACTORS Cliff Mrs e 3 � &a A � �y° ection C instructions RECEIPT OF BID: Wednesday, February 19, 2014, 11:00 A.M. until the above noted time nd date. SIS OF BSealed bids will be received C BA ID. system Upgrade PROJECT DESCRIPTION: Village of Oak Brook Fire Station 493 HV PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION OF BID: 0 a m on Wednesda Februa 12 2014 at the k Illinois 60523, VA C. A Pre -Bid meetin will be held at 10.0 give all Village of Oak Brook Fire Station #93, 3003 725 Enterprise Driof' e meeting is to g mandato . Thep p n questions or concerns Prospective bidders must be at; ire Station #93 at 10:00 a.m. to A considered an attendee. ortunity to view and inspect the site. Y Attendance at this meetin prospective bidders the opp can be addressed at this time. ng Assistant, Village of Oak by Rania Serences, Senior Purch revailing time, and publicly Sealed bids will be receive 14 19, 2014, 11:00 A.M., p Brook, until Wednesday, located in the Butler Government Center, opened in the Samuel E. Dean Board Room, 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, l�S 60523. Bids received after this time will not e considered and will be returned unopened. aces for bid price, unit In case The bid shall be submitted on the exact form furnished. All blanksed in written words shall amount proposed, the prices exp cost and alternates must be filled in in ink -in both words and figures (as stipulated). of any discrepancy in th govern. the following items' D. A complete bid package must be submitted, including 1. Bid 2. Statement of Qualifications 3. References 4. Bid Certification 5. Signed Contract are provided as information, The surety company upon acceptance of the bid by the Village. Department of the E. The Contract and Contract Bond (Performance and Payment) the' U.S. and will be completed only p roved by issuing ted in place of the Contract Bond. the oftCreditw willnotbe accepted sted an app Treasury. of explanation, exception, F. Separate sheets is included in the bid package for the purpose alternate bid and to cover the unit price, if needed person or party interested G. in submitting this bid, the contractor further declares that the only p the bid as principals are those on timed herein, and that the bid is made without collusion in person, firm or corp with any other Page 1 H. The contractor further declares that he has carefully examined this entire Bid Package and he has inspected in detail the site of the proposed work, and that he has familiarized himself with all of the local conditions affecting the contract and the detailed requirements of this work and understands that in making the bid mi he waives all rights to plead a sunderstanding regarding same. The contractor further understands and agrees that if his bid is accepted, he is to furnish and Provide all necessary machinery, tools, apparatus, and other means to do all of the work and to furnish all of the materials specified in the contract, except such materials as are to be furnished by the owner (Village), in the manner and at the time therein prescribed, and in accordance with the requirements therein set forth. J. The contractor declares that he understands that the quantities listed on the Bid are approximate only and that they are subject to increase or decrease; and that he will take in full payment thereof the amount and the summation of the actual quantities, as fully determined by the Village. K. The contractor further agrees that the price submitted within the bid is for the purpose of obtaining a gross sum, and for use in computing the value of extras and deductions. If there is a discrepancy between the gross sum bid and that resulting from the summations of the quantities multiplied by the unit price, the latter shall apply. �• The contractor further agrees that if the Village decides to extend or shorten the work, or otherwise alter it by extras or deductions, including elimination of one or more of the items, as Provided in the specifications, he will perform the work as altered, increased or decreased, at the contract unit price. N. The contractor further agrees that the Village representative may at any time during the Progress of the work covered by this Contract, order other work or materials incidental thereto and that all such work and materials as do not appear in the bid or contract as a specific item covered by a lump sum price, and which are not included under the bid price for other items in the Contract, shall be performed as extra work, and compensation shall be as set forth in the specifications. N A IN The contractor further agrees to execute all documents within this Bid Package, obtain a Certificate of Insurance for this work and present all of these documents within fifteen (15) days after the receipt of the Notice of Award and the Contract by him. The contractor further agrees that he and his surety will execute and present within fifteen (15) days after the receipt of the Notice of Award and the Contract, a� Contract bond satisfactory to and in the form prescribed by the Village, in the penal amount of 100% of the Contract amount, guaranteeing the faithful performance of the work and payment for lab material supplies: and subsubcontractorsin accordance with the terms of the Contract. or, The contractor further agrees to begin work not later than ten (10) days after receipt of the Notice to Proceed, unless otherwise provided, and to execute the work in such a manner and with sufficient materials, equipment and labor as will insure its completion within the time limit specified within the Bid, it being understood and agreed that the completion within the time limit is an essential part of the contract. Page 2 H M S if his bid is accepted, and he Village for any damages the the contractor understands and agrees that, By submitting a Bid' he shall be liable to the to the fails to enter into a contract forthvdith, satisfactory thereby suffer. evidence conditions Village may party offering It shall furnish necessary facilities, ability and pecuniary resources to fulfill the No bid will be considered unless the pspecific ations or Village that ac has nate ad of the plans, .ctor a written Of the Contract. meaning of any P orks responsible he may the request will be endum submit to the Public It the contractor is in doubt as t ents true m arson submitting dile only Y osed contract documents, Thep ants will be m other explanation or other prop retabon thereof. onsible for any request for an interp interpretation of the docum rompt delivery. Aey The Village Will not be resp for its P the Village. duly issued by interpretation of the Bid Package e to establish competition. Bidders SUBSTITUTIONS specified by a manufacturer i trade name propose for merit are P for the purPOse of limas Which they P _f in the materials and equip item A. Certain m uality and performance and no be substitute and standards of q it bids not only on named Ief ufacturers may ance, Products of other ecified in quality, perform the selection among are invited to submed items equal to those sP are specified, substitution of Village they are he o or more items all such items Opinion of the u$e �Jhere two a submit his bid on suitability for intended tion, sealed ecified is the bidder's op or he may specifications- Substitutions for the purpose those sp cluded In the sP ubstitutions are se ff r of In aterials �n if roposed s o e considered only P contract. Theo bids and before B Bids shall be based ds Wild be immediately after all req of evaluating be accepted prior to the award of the Will only oaring bid bid and integral pad of the bid, app the base shall be an considered in Form, with the signature of the bidder. those specified will not otified place in the Bid F Substitutions of materials other than a be listed In the total cost. C• other substitutions may forquality for price. However, e in the base bid P the indication of the chang tofore mentioned, in order for substitutions to q requirements here each bid p In addition {O the fthe o home shall accompany consideration, manufacturer name, unit cost and total cost. The bidder shall prepare 1. Each proposed substitution shall be itemized OS - anner outlined. catalog number, quantity, the necessary forms to list his substitutions in the by descriptive tete technical specifications and reports 2. Each bid offering substitutions shall be technic p$ed substitutions literature, catalog data, comp the bidder's proposed Of all pertinent tests concerning Page 3 b BASIS OF AWARD: The Village of Oak Brook reserves the right technical error and to Brook t Brook. p any bid deemed refect any or all bids and to waive In addition to price, the Villa e most favorable to the interestsof the Village alrty 9 will consider: A• Ability, capacity9 of C and skill to fulfill the contract as specified. B. Ability to supply the commodities provide the services or complete Promptly, or within the time specified, without delay or interference. C, plete the construction Character, integrity, reputation, D Judgment, experience and efficiency. Quality of performance on previous contracts. E' Previous and existing compliance with laws and ordinances relatin F' Sufficiency of financial resources. g to the contract. G• Quality, Y availability and adaptability the commodities, services or construction relation to the Village's requirements.. H. Ability to provide future mainH. tenance and service under the contract. I. Number and scope of conditions attached to the bid/proposal. J. Record of payments for taxes, licenses or other Monies due the Village 7. CONDITIONS- The OND_ f� , The Village is exempt from Federal excise tax #3 _ Tax (#E9997.4381-06). This bid cannot include 36 600-9534 8, WAR Y amounts of money) and the Ifor these llinois ttaxes, Occupation � Upon completion the Contractor shall su pplY a workmanship. one Year warranty covering material and 9. PAY-N_T The Village of Oak Brook authorizes the Y the month. For consideration on these payment of invoices on the second and fourth Tuesda of Tu dates, payment request must be received no later than fourteen or days prior n the second ofourth esda y of the month. Page 4 harmless the Village andlor INDEMNIFICATION save, defend and holandagainst all liabilities, obligations, protect, indemnify, ents from including without limitation court The Contractor shall p volunteers and is and expenses, and/or its officers' officials, employees, enses, which the Village its officers, enalties, causes of action, ees and exp or for which the injury damages, P suffer or susea'son for any accident, 1 claims, agents may incur, ated by ement of costs, insurance deduvoibin{eers andrn9y a become oblig indirectly or employees, tints may e erry or civil andlor constitutiaf sin9r1ng act or officials, employees and damage top p ht Statutes), vlrtue of any an its officers, o{ the Federal Civil R19A reement by provided to or death of persons or loss v- Violations ons ag this Ora g and/or agents, rights (specifically including or as a reemp�oyees, subcontractorsenalties, causes of action, Or un damageS, P . es officers, officials, directly in connection w�t�ontracunder, tor s officers, obligations, of the Villag of any of the omission omission any act or that the Contractor shall not be olely or claims, aratus, costs and expenses arising ents. material, aP he work osis and volunteers andlor ag and all claims u°rose°of per{ormin9 firm, thee harmless for any to any Person, The contractor shall holoch machinery 9 rnished to the contractor for the eamage Ce of such work during equipment, fixtures or m tint of all direct o dt�of thep Momma 5 under the contract; and the payor company or corporation suffered or sustained on the time the contract is in force. 15 days after the receipt INSURANCE' Village within fifteen ( It)being understood and 11. �� shall be presented to the table insurance ward and the unexecutedonf�a� °until accep Certificates of Insurance Notice o{ A rove and execute the by the contractor 0I the Will not approve Village agreed that the roved by Village of Oak Br°ok a chapter certificate of contract with the ont Title 1 of Chap certificates are received and apPwork Pursuant to a Insured") erforming any required pursuant to the p procure ermit as req ermittee shall ries to Each contractor P under a p of Oak Brook (h Such contractorrand pas 11 f°r tn,hal permittee working of the Village Such against claimsthe s ecified herein. erformanC a°tints, of the contract or permit insurance g their 9 the Code of Ordinances uch assurance as P required to carry duration arise from or in connection With mitteep or and maintain for the erty wh1Ch may they by the contractor, P persons or damages to Prop ermit, work under the contract or P representatives, employees or subcontractors. in ury, personal r or p t of the work in question ° � per occurrence for bodily J tract permittee shall maintain insurance with lirruts no less a. A con le limit p 000,000 combined sing the estimated co General Liability rty damage, provided that when 500,000; A. and prof the required limit shall be $ per accident for bodily injury single limit p does not exceed $5,000, 1 000,000 combined 9 B Automobile Liability (if applicable) injury and property damage, Page 5 C. Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability by the Labor Code of the State of Illinois and Employer's Liability limits of accident. -Worker's Compensation limits as requin Any deductibles or self-insured retention must be declared to and a ��'000,000 p Option of the Village, either the insurer shall reduce or eliminate such deductible or self-' nsure retention as respects the Village, its officers, officials, employees approved by the Village. At th shall prors- cure a bond guaranteeing its administration and defense expenses to the extent of such deductible ord self-insured ininvestigations, rationor Insure payment of losses and related investigations, Clair The policies shall contain, or be endorsed to contain the followingnoon. D• General Liability provisions: and Automobile Liability Coverage - (1) The Village, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers are to be covered additional insureds as respects: liability arising behalf of the Insured; premises owned, occupied or used by the Insured. The coverage a shall contain no special limitations on the scope of Protection ' the to the Village, y or on officers, officials, employees, volunteers, or agents. dlage, its (2) The Insured's insurance coverage shall be primary insurance as respects the Village, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers and agents. Any insurance or insurance maintained by the Village, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers or agents shall be in excess of the Insured's insurance and shall not contribute with it. self- l3) Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the Provided to the Village, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers or agents, Policies shall not affect coverage The ured's insurance shall (4) claim l ismadeor suit s brought exccept with respect to each covered Party p ct to the limits of the nsurerr''s liabinst ility. E Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability Coverage The policy shall waive all rights of subrogation against the Village, its officers, Officials, employees, volunteers and agents for losses arising from work insured for the Village, cithe Each insurance performed by the canceled b policy shall be endorsed to state that coverage shall not be suspended, voided notice b y either party, reduced in coverage or in limits except after thirty30 y certified mail has been given to the 'Village• Village, its officers officials and employeesEach )days prior written Insurance is to be placed with insurers with a Best's rating of no less than A: VII. volunteers and a ents as olicy shall name the, g additional Insureds. Each Insured shall furnish the Village with certificates of insurance and with original endo effecting coverage required b insurance policy are to be signed this is provision. The certificate and endorsements for each behalf. The certificates and endorsements are to ho iz forms a g eon its Y a person authorized r that insurer to bind coverage the Village and sits be subject to approval by the Village Attorney right to require complete, certified copies of all required work commences. , at any reserves the quired insurance policies, at any time. Page 6 policies or shall furnish de all subcontractors as u tractor. All coverages for subcontractors ' I insureds under its Each insured shall inc separate ubject certificates eall ofthe reqendors uirements stated herernents for each in. n shall be subject SAS_ I with all the provisions of the Federal The contractor and any subcontractors shall comply as amended. Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (84 Stat. 1590 , ENAL OPPORTDNITY' employee or applicant for employment because of against any lacer birth, age or handicap unrelated to The Contractor will not dis ancestry,iminate ational origin, p race, color, religion, bona fide occupational qualifications. TE OF WAGES: compliance with The PREVAILING RA a violates a each t where a prevailing wage govern. All wages paid by the Contractor an as amendedex except subcontractor shall be in com to the federal law, order, or ruling Prevailing Wage Act (820 ILCS 130), e rates set forth in federal law, order, or ruling, the rate conforming a rates, the responsible to notify each subcontractor of the wag The Contractor shall be v s ons thereto. if the Department of Labor revises the wag this contract and any public body shall apply to this contract and the Contractor will revised rate as provided by the to time. Not not be allowed additional compensation on account of said revisions. wage law, as amended from armtmle t of Labor sha I Contractor will comply with the Illinois prevailing Owner or the' Dep prevailing rate of wages as found by performing work under the Contr workersthor less than the p workers and mechanics wages to be paid laborers, be paid to all laborers, prevailing gives such Department of Labor revises the e Contractor and dies a of whether owner g e Chang rate of wages; provided, however, reg a the revised mechanics under the Contract, Owner will not I to the Contract and Contractor shall have in the prevailing prevailing rate of wages shall apply notice, the revised p and duty to page and ensure that all Subcontractorsapplicable. Revision of the the sole responsibility person to whom a revised rate is app but not prevailing rate of wages to each p loss, including owner. prevailing wages shall not result in an increase in the Contract sum or other this prevailing pre defend and hold Owner harmless from any us preve the Contractor shall indemnify,s fees, resulting from Contractor's failure rovisionpas will g , limited to Owner's attorney licable to the Contract shall i rate e w Provision wage clause. All bonds app a the prevailing faithful performance of the obligation to Pay for a period of not less than 3 and other workers employed by them on the project; The Contractor and each subcontractor shall make and eep, hone number when e project; years, records of all laborers, mechanics, address, telephone paid in each period, the hourly the records shall include each worker's nam and ending times of work each day. social security number, classification or and thestartingerson, by mail, or in charge of the project. The certified payroll the, number of hours worked each day, The Contractor and eaca roll toctherpubl'c body actor shall submit monthly, in electronically a certified payroll Page 7 16. 17 shall consist of a complete copy of the records. The certified payroll shall be accompanied b statement signed by the contractor or subcontractor which states that: r) such records are true and accurate; y (ii) the hourly rate paid to each worker is not less than the general prevailing rate of ho wages required; and Payroll that (iii) at he or she the contractor or subcontractor is aware that filing a certified url knows to be false is a Class B misdemeanor. Upon 2 business days' notice, the contractor and each subcontractor shall make available inspection the records to the for the Director e Labor and his de lic body in charge of the project, its officers and agents, and to this State. The Contractor and each subcontractor shall permit his/her employees to deputies and agents at all reasonable hours at a location within interviewed on the job, during working hours, by compliance investigators of the De the Department of Labor. be 15. FMPI f%WR..-.._ Department or UNEMPLOYMENT ILLINOIS WORKERS DURING PERIODS OF The Contractor shall comply with all Illinois statutes pertaining to the selection Whenever there is a peri d of labor. month immediately followin f excessive unemployment in Illinois, which is defined herein as any 2 consecutive calendar unemployment in the State of III Illinois has exceeded 5 percent as measured by the United S Bureau of Labor Statistics in its month) months during which the level of the Contractor shall employ only Illinois lab operation of employment states resided in Illinois for at least 30 days and intends to become or remain andIllinois nresident, Illinois laborer,, unemployment figures, means any person who has Other laborers may be used when Illinois laborers as defined herein are not available or incapable of performing the approved by the Municipality. the Particular Contractor may work involved, if so certified by the Contractor and non-resident executive and technical experts, who do not qualify as Illinois laborers, to do are encompassed by this Contract Burin a y place no more than 3 of his regularly employed g period of excessive unemployment. work This provision applies to all labor, whether skilled, semi -skilled or unskilled, whether non -manual. COPIES OF DOCUMENTS manual or The number of copies of Contract and Bond required to be executed is as follow a) Two (2) s:original counterparts of the Contract docu to be executed, ments will be required EXECUTION OF DOCUMENTS The Contractor, in signing his Bid on the whole or on any portion of the work, shall conform to following requirements: the Page 8 resented i the BiBiddndocuments name shall the evidencing authority to sign A Bid signed by an individoWer of attorney person individua rep have attached thereto a p an attorney in -fact. if person for whom it is signed. all of the partners or by evidencing partnership shall be signed by ower of attorney A bid signed for a p in fact, there shall be attached to the Bid a p signed by an attorney executed by the partners. Of authority to sign the bid, orate orate name thereof below the corp re A bid signed for a corporation, shall have the e corporation manually the President or other authorized officer of the corp oration, a certified name. of such official to sign the an official other than the President of the corporation, si ned by the authority If such Bid is manually 9 signature of the Secretary o spy of a resolution of the board of directors evidencing h, impression of the corporate seal. Bid should s attache, fed to it. Such Bid shall also bear the attesting notice of award shall have the corporation an e been awarded when forma n M 19. The Contract ued shall the mended awardee. been duly NOW DISCRIMINATING: Rights Act, the U.S. Civil Rights and subcontractors, agrees not to commit unlawful discrimination an The Vendor, its employeesliand provisions of the Illinois Human RI9 able to each. agrees to comply with app Act and Section 504 of the Federal Rehabilitation Act, and rules app CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR and the VILLAGE. INDEPENDENT between the CON RACTO S employee for all employeelemployer relationship There is no is an independent contractor and not the the Social CONTRACTOR the application of the Fair Labors Standards c I but not limited to, ensation Act (820 ILCS purposes, a meats, Federal Insurance Contribution Act, e and overtime p Y the Worker's Comp e includinlgobut minimum ! aghe Federal Unemployment Tax Act, form of insurance cove o, other employee Security Act, rovide any 30511, et seq. The VILLAGE ill ensaton, professional liability insurance, to CONTRACTOR-Theany joint worker's comp construed as creating not limited to health, uct any taxes or related items from them e co paid and the VILLAGE is benefits, or (ii) and the VILLAGE including but not performance of the services described herein shall not e between the CONTRACTOR the CONTRACTOR, agency employment relationship obligations incurred by nor does there exist an a9 aid minimum wages and/or overtime premiums, not and will not be liable for any limited to unpaid between the VILLAGE and the CONTRACTOR. relationship or partnership 20 ASSNLAGE nor the CONTRA shall assign or transfer any Neither the VIL CONTRACTOR reement without the prior written consent of the other party, under this Ag withheld. not be unreasonably 21. GOVERNING LAW rights or obligauox„ which consent shall This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Illinois as to interpretation, performance and enforcement. The forum for resolving any disputes concerning the parties, respective performance or failure to perform under this Agreement shall be the Circuit Court for the Eighteenth Judicial Circuit, DuPage County, Illinois. Page 10 ;action D Specifications Fire Station #93 HVAC System Upgrade Village of Oak Brook 1 SECTION 00 01 Ol PROJECT TITLE PAGE PROJECT MANUAL FOR VILLAGE OF OAKBROOK UPGRADE FIRE STATION NO. 93 - HVAC SYSTEM 725 ENTERPRISE DRIVE OAK BROOK, ILLINOIS 60523 OWNER VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK 1200 OAK BROOK ROAD OAK BROOK, ILLINOIS 60523 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER KLUBERARCHITECTS + ENGINEERS 10 S. SHUMWAY AVE. BATAVIA, ILLINOIS 60510 END OF DOCUMENT 0001 01 -1 PROJECT NO. 12-172"743 CopyrightO 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 00 01 01 PROJECT TITLE PAGE SECTION 00 01 07 SEALS PAGE 1.01 DESIGN PROFESSIONALS SEALS B. STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: A. ARCHITECT: D. ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: C M/ CHANiCAL ENGINEER: END OF DOCUMENT SECTION 00 Ol 07 SEALS PAGE 00 01 07 - 1 PROJECT NO. 12.172.743 Copyright© 2014 by ICLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGES REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACTING 00 01 Ol -1-1 PROCUREMENT Introductory Information 00 Ol 07-1'1 00 01 01 Project Title Page 00 Ol 10-1-3 00 Ol 07 Seals Page Contents 00 01 15-1-1 0001 10 Table of Sheets 0001 15 List of Drawing SPECIFICATIONS uirements Req pl 1000-1-1 Division 01 -- General 01 23 0p-1-1 _. 01 10 00 Summary 01 3000-1 -6 Ol 23 00 Alternates en's (1 page att°chment) Requirem 0l 42 00-1-5 ()1 30 00 Administrative 01 50 00-1-3 Ol 4200 References Controls and ()1 60 00_1-4 01 5000 Temporary Facilities (1 page attachment) pl 70 00-1-9 uirements ()1 6000 Product Req Requirements Closeout 01 7700-1-2 Ol 7000 Execution and Ol 78 00-1-4 O1 77 00 Closeout Procedures 01 79 00-1-3 Submittal' Ol 7800 Closeout Subm Training Ol 7900 Demonstration and 02 41 00-1'3 Existing Conditions Division 02 -- o241 00 Demolition 05 1200-1-3 Division 05 -- Metals Steel Framing p5 50 00-1-2 051200 Structural 055000 Metal Fabrications osites Comp O6 1p pp -1-4 Division 06 -- Wood, Plastics, and 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry Moisture Protection 07 O1 50.19-1-2 Division 07 __Thermal and for Re Roofing 07 46 19-1-3 07 W 5p,19 Preparation 07 52 001 8 07 46 19 Steel Siding Membrane Roofing 07 62 0p-1-3 M 07 52 00 Modified Bituminous Metal Flashing and Trim SECTIoN 00 01 10 p7 62 00 Sheet TABL.E OF CONTENTS 000110-1 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 Ati Rights Reserved 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; Copyright© 07 84 00 Firestopping 07 90 05 Joint Sealers 078400-1-4 Division 09 -- Finishes 07 90 OS -1-5 0921 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 0957 00 Acoustical Ceilings 09 21 16-1-4 09 90 00 Painting and Coating 09 51 00-1-4 Division 22 -- Plumbing 09 90 00-1-8 22 1005 Plumbing Piping Division 23 -- Heating, Ventilating,22 1005-1-5 230593 and grr_Conditioning (HVAC) Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 230773 Duct Insulation 23 30593-1-4 2322 13 Steam and Condensate23 07 Heatin 13-1-2 2331 00 HVAC Duets and Casings g Piping 23 22 13-1-3 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 23 31 00-1-4 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets 233300-1-2 2374 13 Packaged Outdoor Central -Station 233700-1,2 Air -Handling Units 2384 15 Steam Humidifiers 23 74 13-1-10 Division 26 -- Electrical 23 84 15-1-3 26 05 00 Basic Electrical Requirements 26 05 01 Minor Electrical Demolition 26 05 00-1-3 2605 19 Building Wire and Cable 26 05 01-1-2 26 05 26 Grounding and Bo 2605 19-1-8 260529 HBonding for Electrical Systems angers and Supports for Electrical Systems 260526-1-3 26 05 26 05 34 Conduit 29-1-4 26 05 37 Boxes 260534-1-8 34-1_g 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical S 26 05 37-1-5 Wiring C 26 05 20.26 Ystems 26 05onnections 53-1-5 2624 13 Service and Distribution 26 05 20.26-1-2 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 2624 13-1-2 2651 10 Lighting 26 27 26-1-7 Division 28 -- Electronic Safety and Security 2651 10-1-3 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 �2014b 0001 Capy �9ht© y KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 10 2 SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS 28 31 00-j-8 28 31 00 Fire Detection and Alarm END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110-3 T NO. 12-172 X43 PROJEC Copyright2014 by KLUBER, INC•% All Rights Reserved © SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 00 01 15 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS GENERAL GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLS & DRAWING INDEX G100 COVER SHEET, ARCHITECTURAL R DEMOLITION PLAN A210 FIRST FLOO A320 PARTIAL ROOF PLAN AREA V AND DETAILS A410 RCEILING EFLECTED PLAN STRUCTURALOTES AND DETAILS 5300 PARTIAL EXISTING ROOF FRAMING PLAN, N MECHANICAL M210 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION PLAN M310 FIRST FLOOR AND ROOF MECHANICAL PLANS ELECTRICAL 050 ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS LIST AND ABBREVIATION E050 DEMOLITION PLAN E21 0 ELECTR ELECTRICAL PLAN E310 FIRST FLOOR AND ROOF ONE -UNE DIAGRAMS, ELECTRICAL DETAILS AND E610 ELECTRICAL, FIRE ALARM SCHEDULES END OF DOCUMENT 000115-1 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 00 Ol 15 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY PART 1 GENERAL PROJECT o, 93 -HVAC• 1.01 Fire Station N Project Name Oak Brook. Owners Name: Village of En ineers. g' Kluber Architects + 9 Stipulated Price as described in C. Architect's Name' CT DESCRIPTION Stip 1.02 CONTRA Cp, single pr"Yje contract based on a A. ContractTi p instructions. Section trRATIONSWORK removal work Is shown on drawings 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF A LTE A• Scope of demolition and s shown on drawings• ork d ceilings B, Scope of alterations w complete finishes o on the Drawings• areas, 93 as shown the Drawings' C. Renovate the eats of'Fiirre Station NO construction as shown on as shown 1 • Living with new construction system system with new D. HVAC: Replace existing Y lace existing Y power and Lighting: Rep of new ceilings• E Electrical_Pow required for installation on the Drawings odifications as req Fire Suppression Sprinklers: M F. Completion. 1.04 OWNER OCCUPANCY ect upon Substantial A Owner intends to occupy the Proj to facilitate Owner s operations. Owner to minimize conflict and occupancy. g Cooperate with odate OwneY C. Schedule the Work to accomm PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY 011000-1 PROJECT No. 12-1 72-743 tNC•1 Ali Rights CopYri9h,© 2014 by KLUBER, Reserved SECTION 01 23 00 ALTERNATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Description of alternates. B. Procedures for pricing alternates. C. Documentation of changes to Contract Sum and Contract Time. 1.02 ACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATES accepted rejected Owner's A Alternates qForms l be en and option Accepted alternates beidentified the OwnrCotractorAgeent B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each alternate. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1 - Electrode Steam Humidifiers. 1. Alternate Bid Item: Section 238415 -Steam Humidifiers- Pr. condensate piping humidifier, duct dispersion manifold, accesones, steam piping, and supply cold water piping as required for a fully operationalbuilding humidifier in accordance with manufacturer's installation req B. Alternate No. 2 - Demolition of hot water supply and return piping marn ins in living quarters area of building. and cap pipes at 1 water supply atnd return ma in b?an0 hs,czone hothanical Dwater'pumpon Plan- Remove al of boiler header piping. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 012300-1 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 01 23 00 ALTERNATES SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preconstruction meeting. B. Site mobilization meeting. C. Progress meetings• ress schedule. ct closeout. D. Construction prog E. Submittals for review, information, and Plot' F. Architect -provided CAD files. G. Number of copies of submit - tats -H. Submittal procedures. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Requirements: Additional coordination A. Section Ol 70 00 - Execution and Closeout requirements. project record documents. g, Section Ol 78 00 - Closeout Submittals: 1.03 PROJECT COORDINATION areas of site; for A Project Coordinator: General Contractor. facilities. project Coordinator in allocation park'mgb liZation g, Cooperate with the for site access, traffithe Project c, field offices and sheds, se of site and facilities through C. 0 E. During construction, coordinate u rocedures for intra -project communications; Coordinator. drawings, and Corn"' with Project Coordinators p coordination submittals, reports and records, schedules, uities and conflicts. utilities and recommendations; and resolution of am oo orary protect Coordinator for use o temp Comply with instructions of the s of the Project G. construction facdrties. and layout work under instruction Coordinate field engineering h the Project Coordinator: Coordinator. of submittals to Architect t rou Make the following typesg I Requests for interpretation. 2 Requests for substitution. data, and samples. Product 3. Shop drawings, P orfs. 4. Test and inspection rep 5. and field rep Design data. orts. A Manufacturer's instructions SECTION 01 30 00 01 30 00 - 1 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 8. Proglress's hdulspYment and change order re 9. Coordination drawings quests. 10. Closeout submittals. PART PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Architect will schedule p meeting After Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: 1 • Owner. 2. Architect. 3• Contractor. D. 3.02 A. B. C. Agenda.- I. genda:1• Execution of Owner -Contractor Agreement. 2• Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents 4. Submission of list of Subcontractors. , list of Products, schedule of values, and Progress schedule, S. Designation of personnel re and Architect. presenting the parties to Contract 6• Procedures and , General Contractor processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, a for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. pplications 7. Scheduling. Record minutes and distribute copies within copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and thotwo se Ys after meeting to participants SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING affected by decisions made. with Architect will schedule a meeting at the Project site prior to Contractor Attendance Required: 1 • Contractors, Occupancy. 2. Owner, 3• Architect. 4• Contractor's Superintendent. 5. Major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1 • Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 2. Owner's requirements and occupancy prior to 3• Construction facilities and controls 4• Tempora provided by completion. 5 Survey ry utilities provided by Owner, Owner. Y and building layout. 6. Security and housekeeping procedures. 7• Schedules. PROJECT NO. 12-172.743 01 30 0o . 2 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SE TI ECTION 01 ADMINISTRATIVE 30 00 REQUIREMENTS S. Application for payment procedures. q. Procedures for testing • record documents. 10. Procedures for maintaining of equipment. construction Requirements for start 11. -fP ui ment put into service during 12. Inspection and acceptance of eq p to participants, with period. p s •after meeting Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two doY copies to Architect, 3.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS s throughout progress of the Work at maximum A. Schedule and administer meeting ies for participants, preside monthly intervals. s are agenda with cop g Make arrangements for meeting , p re p owner, at meetings. or Subcontractors and suppliers, Jo C. Attendance Required: b superintendent, MOI Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: 1 , Review minutes of pprev ous meetings• 2. Review of Work Prop and decisions. ede, planned progress. 3, Field observation 'isproblems, that impede, or will imp 4. Identification of p 5. Review of submittals cess schedule status of submittals. b. Maintenance of prop ain projected schedules. 7. Corrective measures to reg P , work period. g, Planned progress during succeeding q, Maintenance of quality and work standards. d changes on progress schedule and coordination• 10. Effect of propose to Work. to articipants, with 11. Other business relating s after meeting decisions made, articipants, and those affected by E. Record minutes an copies within two ay to Architect, 3.04 A. B copies CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE CONSTRUCTION submit preliminary schedule defining s after date of the Agreesof Work, with a g planned operatioeneral outline for remainder Within 10 day ns for the first 60 day within 10 of work. submit revised schedule If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, { roposed complete C days, schedule, submit draft o p a Within 20 days fter review of preliminary schedule for review. or contractors have reviewed and accepted 1, Include written certification that mal proposed schedule. bmit complete schedule. D. Within 10 days after joint review, su E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. 01 3000-3 PROTECT NO. 12-172-743 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 3.05 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: I. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. C Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: 1. Design data. 2. Certificates. 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports. 5. Manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated. B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. No action will betaken. 3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A• When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Other types as indicated. B. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion. 3.08 ARCHITECT -PROVIDED CAD FILES A. After the execution of the Contract, Architect will provide, free of charge, upon receipt of a properly completed and signed request utilizing "Electronic Data Transfer Consent Form" at the end of this Specification Section, CAD files depicting graphic information for the project as follows: 1. Architectural Floor Plans: Column grid, walls, floors, stairs, doors, windows, room numbers, ceiling grid, mechanical diffusers, plumbing fixtures, sprinkler heads (if depicted in Bid Documents) and lights. B. Contractor acknowledges and accepts that the Architectural Floor Plans do not contain structural, mechanical, electrical, plumbing, fire protection and other building systems PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 01 3000-4 Copyright© 2014 by KLUSER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Documents. Examples of information nOschedules, pocum title blocks, keynotes, depicted in the Bidding mbols, circuit numbers and information dep but are not limited to, ork and equipment, electrical device sY rams, and will contained in these files inclu e, runs and riser diag data or information mechanical dlumbing equipment, piping home runs, pen ineering text or details. No other CAD files, architectural/ g must obtain the be provided. tractors will be honored. Subcontractors C. W CM uests from Prime Con Only req Contractors. files from their respectiveCPor r actor acknowledges that: In submitting a request, for the data or its transmission a relieves the 1, Architect bears no responsibility and all products Use of the data by the Contractor or his subcontractors in no `N 2. ations under the Contract, from any Contractor of his obligations and all claims arising from the data, 3, by is solely liable for any non-exclusive license to use the generated by the Contractor or its Subcontractors nonemploying the ork of the Project, and that 4. Contractor and its Subcontractors have a l to the data. data solely in connecti h.it ludi g copyright 5. Architect retains all rig ts TTALS NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMI copies, 17 inches. Submit two j2) paper copies A. Documents for Review: Larger Than 11 x 1 Small Size Sheets: Not L. Architect. Contractor shall make his own one of which will be retained by Architect. from the original returned by format ia Contractor's Op in Adobe PDF electronic file format Via tion: Submit in Adobe PDF electronic filetble filesvwill be' o• ht -side up; illegible Architect will return a reviewe COpy Submit email. Create PDFs at native size and rig 36 x 48 inches maximum. rejected. Architect. Electronic file format 2 Large Size Sheets: Larger Than 11 x17 inches; co ies from the two (2j paper copies, one of which will be retained by (PDF or other) is NOT acceptable. Contractor shall make his own cop le Architect. original returned by ne copy ne of 3.10 A. Documents for Information: Submit o sections, o les: Submit the number specified in individual specification Samp Architect. roduce duplicates. specifically so state which will be retained by 1, After review, p will not be returned to Contractor unless 2. Retained samples SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ' SUBM GB10. submittals with original number an 't each submittal with AIA Form C. Transm Revise Sequentially number the transmittal form. and detail x. a sequential alphabetic suft'Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing project, Contractor, as appropriate on each copy identify approval' number, and specification section number, that review, tamp, signed or initialed certifying SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS D Apply Contractors s 01 3000-5 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 Copyrighi© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved J. K. L. E. G. H. verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements Contract Documents. Work, and q menfs of the Work and Deliver submittals to Architect at business address. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. For each submittal for review, allow 20 days excluding delivery time f Contractor. Clearly identify variationso and from the from the variation, Contractorissolely responsible for errors in the field that arise from submittal Contract Documents. Regardless of the variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents fi Pe of expressly noted to specifically identify for ments if those variations were not variation from the Contract Documents. and describe to the reviewer the Identify variations from ments, nature of the be detrimental to successful tract Documents and Product or system limitations that may Performance of the completed Work. Correlate submitted items with s y that corresponds to each submitted products; clearly indicate the specified Product miffed item. ecified When options or optional features available for a Product are indicated in a submittal, and selections for those options/features are indicated in the Contract Documents, identify on the submittal the selection indicated in the Contract Docu Provides pace for Contractor and Architect review stamps menfs. M. When revised for resub the Architect, identi mission, using clouds, highlights or other not clearly identify allchanges made since means acceptable to unreviewed, geS may y be delayed and/or returned to heission submitfals that do N• The Contractor is entitled to one 1Contractor Closeout Submittal item rejected b) resubmittal of any Shop An action. Thereafter, the Contractor shall Architect or returned b Drawing, Product Data, or Shop Drawing, Pay the cost of all furthertge hit cps revoews of such further rev ev duct Data or Closeout Submittal, of a rate of will be deducted from the Contract Su $200'00/hour. O. Distribute reviewed sub m b Chan Cost of submittals as appropriate. y ge Order. inability to comply with requirements. Instruct quirements. Parties to promptly report an P. Submittals not requested will not be recognizedy may Q. Submittal reviews or processed. any of the followiny be delayed and/or submittals may be returned unreviewed for Sub I • g reasons: Submittals submitted outside the scheduled dates of the Submittal Schedule. 2• Submittals are incomplete or are missing information. 3. Submittals are not submitted in accordance withprocdures outlined in this Section (i.e. spec Section number not indicated submitted items not correlated with s missing Contractor's review st pecified products), amp END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12.172.743 Co i 01 30 00 PYrght© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Klubef .Architaccs r E"Ineefs SENT FORM ELECTR®NIC DATA TRANSFER CON 93 - HVAC SYSTEM UPGRADE ed' FIRE ST FIRE OAKK BNo'ROOK _ Proj VILtA 725 ENTERPRI EDRI\II 60523 OAK BROOK, Kluber Project: 12-172-743 VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK request and for your Owner: ou solely at your reg Inc bears no oviding electronic data to Y you agree that Kober,11Claims an Illinois corporation, is P and all claims referring °r INC., ening °nY of the electronic e oleI liable for any KLUBER, and °P y accepting You and that Y moY generate with the data. convenience. BY in conned!on with data products you, or your Subcontractors, ight to the liability for the and a Irpts ductsmisslon ° including copy relating to any rights, above, n-' that Kluber, Inc. retains all acknowledge that you have °earited non-exclusive license to use the information solely You ackn al ecu caption your work on the protect data. (Signature) Acknowledged by: (Printed are) Company' Email: drawings and as -built ounasforshop windows, room Date: stairs, doors, id, walls, floors, mbols, contain graphic information for column 9 e u! rent, electrical dd'ee ra sY and Cis such, diffusers and sprinkler heads where indicated on Bid Documa�s Plans Architectural Floor Plans are transmitted for the contractors use °s riser drawings, and, d, lights, receptacles, mechanical ducwork and r P and Part P numbers, ceiling 9 keynotes, schedules, equipment, PP ng runs plans as and home runs, plumbing d contain title blocks, y details. Plans depict en_ t. fIOD°WG fo ro})not formatte circuit numbers text and architectural/engineering ovided in R2007 . depicted in the Bidding Documents. Files are p PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES 1.01 SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES A. Drawing symbols, abbreviations and acronyms. Documents. B. Definitions of terms used throughout the Contract C. Explanation of specification referen Qed andardscontent. p Requirements rating to E. Applicability of referenced standards. F. List of industry organizations and certain of their respective documents. 1.02 DRAWING SYMBOLS AND CONVENTIONS symbol, A. Abbreviations and graphic symbols are defined on the General Notes, & drawings conform to those Abbreviations sheet of the drawings• symbols are g, Generally, symbols used on the mechanical appropriate c these A ASPE, or the IEEE. recommended by ASHRAE, thoug supplemented by more specific symbols as recommended by ASM 1.03 DEFINITIONS"scheduled", "shown°, or "specified" are used it is to A. help ere the terms it the reference; I' ted" on on location is intended except as sp ecifically „ „ " are used as in noted. " "authorized , approved , re uested , shall be construed to extend g• Where the terms "directed', ineer'", no implied meaning "directed by the Architect/Eng urview of construction the Architect/Engineers responsibilities into the Contractor's p supervision. unction with the Architect/Engineer's action on C. Where the term "approved" is used in is limited ineer as nests or applications it is limited to the duties emental Condit ons of the submittals, req Agreement, and the General and supplemental described in the Ag royal" shall not limit or release the Contractor from Contract. Such use of the term "a pp uirements. Iicable statutes, laws, ordinances, his responsibility to fulfill Contrac req D. Where the term "regulations" is used it means all qpp urns alion, as well as construction industry and orders iusueoby onvenntio'ns that address performance of the Work. standards, rules, I deliver, and unload to the construction E. Where the term "furnish" is used it means supply operations at the job site to Work- site ready for assembly and incorporation into the W°r cleaning and assembling, placing, anchoring, finishing, protecting, F. Where the term "install" is used it is meant to descri e op include unloading, aired to fully incorporate an item into the Work. all other similar operations req SECTION 01 42 00 01 4200-1 REFERENCES PROJECT NO, 12-172-743 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved G. Where the term "provide" is used it means "furnish and install" as defined above. H. The "Project Site" is the space available to the Contractor for performance of construction activities. The Project Site may be for the exclusive use of the Contractor and his activities or may be used in conjunction with others with others performing other construction or related activities on the Project. The Extent of the Project Site is indicated on the drawings. 1.04 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT A. These Specifications are based on the Construction Specification Institute's 49 Division format and numbering system. B. Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is an abbreviated type. Implied words and meanings will appropriately interpreted. C. Requirements expressed in imperative and streamlined language are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in the text, subjective language may be used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor or others. 1. Whenever a colon (:) us used within a sentence or phrase, it shall be construed to mean the words "shall be". D. Use of certain terms such as "carpentry" is not intended to imply that certain activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name. The Specifications do, however, require that certain construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in the operations to be performed. Specialists shall be used for said activities, however the final responsibility for fulfilling the requirements of the Contract remains the Contractor's. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For products or workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue specified in this section, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. C. Obtain copies of standards when required by the Contract Documents. D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion. E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from the Architect before proceeding.. F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of the Architect shall be altered by the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.06 APPLICABILITY OF INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Construction industry standards shall have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly in the Contract Documents, except where more stringent requirements PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 01 4200-2 SECTION 01 42 00 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights. Reserved REFERENCES licable standards are made a part of the Contract ecified. All such app conflicting are sp reference. Documents by liance with two or more standards are rw th the encec more stringent uality or quantities occur, comply omp y standards to the 1 V/here comp apparently conflicting requirementsfor q regarding app requirements. Refer questions reg decision before proceeding• shown, or referenced shall e uantity levels specified, questions regarding standards of Architect fora uality or q Refer q 2. The standard to be provided or performed. roceeding• the minimum uantity to the Architect before p C,e NTS minimum quality or q TIONS AND DO 1.07 CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY ORGANt7A INC- A. AA ALUMINUM ASS AIR BALANCE ONCE COUNCIL CN B AABC ASSOCIATED AIR ITECT MANUFACTURERS ASSO D TIRAANSPORTATION C AAMA __ AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL STATE HIGHWAY AND D AASHTO -_ AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OFFICIALS . E. ACI AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL STRU F. AISC AMERICAN INSTITUTO STANDARDS F STEEL IINST TUTIEON IN C. G. ANSI -- AMERICAN NATIONALOF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND H. ASHRAE -- AMERICAN SOCIETY AIR-CONDITIONING' INC ENGINEERS, ENGINEERS AMERICAN 1. ASME - THE SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL EN 2004. 1 • ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and EscaTERIALS ESTING AND MA 1• ASTM -- AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESINSTITUTEINSTITUTE K. AWI __ ARCHITECTURALW AMERICAN WOOD -PRESERVERS' ASSOCIATION L AWS AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY M. AWS-- MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION N BHMA __ BUILDERS HARDWARE MA .C. 13H BRICK INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION P BOCA BUILDING OFFICIALS & CODE ADMIN' 1�AONRS INTERNATIONAL, IN Q. CPSC - CONSUMER PRODUCTS SAFETY R DHI _ DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTITUTEE S DIN __ DEUTSCHES INSTITUT FUR H CORP G ORATION T. FM -- FACTORY MUTUAL RESEARCH CORP U ICC __ INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL, V. IEEE - INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC E GINEERS W. ISO -- INTERNATIONAL STANDARDSSECTION of 42 0 S 014200-3 PROTECT NO. 12-172-743 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 0 X' MFMA --MAPLE FLOORING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION Y. NAAMM --THE NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS Z. NCMA -_ NATIONAL CONCRETE MASONRY ASSOCIATION AA. NEBB __ NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU AB. NEMA -_ NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION AC. NFPA -- NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION AD. NRCA -- NATIONAL ROOFING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION AE. PCI -- PRECAST/PRESTRESSED CONCRETE INSTITUTE AF. SDI -- STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE AG. SDI -- STEEL DECK INSTITUTE, INC. AH. SGCC -- SAFETY GLAZING CERTIFICATION COUNCIL Al. SIGMA _ SEALED INSULATING GLASS MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (See IGMA) AJ. SJI -- STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE AK. SMACNA -- SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, INC. AL. SSPC -- THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS AM. TCA -- TILE COUNCIL OF AMERICA, INC. AN. UL -- UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. AO. USG -- UNITED STATES GYPSUM I. USG (HB) - Gypsum Construction Handbook; Seventh Edition. AP. WWPA -- WESTERN WOOD PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION I.OB UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT AND RELATED AGENCIES/DOCUMENTS A. CFR -- CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS B• CPSC -- CONSUMER PRODUCTS SAFETY COMMISSION C. EPA -- ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY D. FS -- FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS (General Services Administration) E. GSA __ U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION F. USGS -- UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY 1.09 STATE GOVERNMENT AND RELATED AGNECIES/DOCUMENTS A. CDB -- ILLINOIS CAPITAL DEVELOPMENT BOARD B. IDOL -- ILLINOIS DEPARTMENT OF LABOR C. IDPH -- ILLINOIS DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC HEALTH PROJECT NO. 12.172-743 014200-4 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES D IEpA __ ILLINOIS ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY E. OSFM -- OFFICE OF THE ILLINOIS STATE FIRE MARSHAL. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION 014200-5 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 h{s Reserved Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All R'g SECTION Ol 42 00 REFERENCES SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A, Temporary utilities. R Temporary telecommunions services. cati C. D. E. F. TemppYgry sanitary facilities. enclosures. Temporary Controls: Barriers and S curity requirements. G. e Vehicular access and parking' Waste removal facilities and services. H. Field offices. 1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES facilities. provide the followin of connection to existing cilities• A. Owner will p consisting existing 1, Electrical power of connection to 2 Water supply consisting g, Existing Use trigger -operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of wa er. facilities may be used. C• S SERVICES 1.03 TELECOMMUNICATION unications services to field office at time ° A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecomm project o m bilization. aired to carry Project Manager b contractors are re g• mmunications services and all su Telecoshall inclu e: 1 • Cellular Phone: pro ect use. mobile cell phones. ed for p j 2. Email: Account/address resery es Provide at time of project NITARY FACILITIES: 1.04 TEMPORARY SA enclosur provide and maintain required facilities and A. permitted. mobilization. located at project site is p g, Use of existing facilities inally found. clean and sanitary condition. as prig C. Maintain dally in or better condition Of construction, return facilities to same D At end to prevent access BARRIERS: to construction areas, ote t existing 1.05 prevent unauthorized entry public and to o erations and ozardousto workers or the p A. Provide barriers top damage from construction p to areas that could be ent properties from SECTION 01 50 00 facilities and adj CONTROLS 015000-1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND •- PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 © 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All CopY�'ghiRights Reserved demolition. B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way. C. Provide protection for interior surfaces, fixtures, furniture and equipment scheduled to remain in the facility during the.entire course of construction. At end of construction, return interior surfaces, fixtures, furniture and equipment to same or better condition as originally found. D. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. 1.06 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES: A. Provide temporary weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks. B. Provide temporary roofing as specified in Section 07 01 50.19, Preparation for Re -Roofing. 1.07 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES: A. Provide temporary partitions as required to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into existing finish surfaces, fixtures, furnishings and equipment and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. B. Construction: Framing and reinforced polyethylene sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces and hardboard sheets to protect flooring surfaces. 1.08 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. B. Coordinate with Owner's security program. 1.09 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Comply with regulations relating to use of streets and sidewalks, access to emergency facilities, and access for emergency vehicles. B. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner. C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. D. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. E. Existing parking areas located at project site may be used for construction parking. 1.10 WASTE REMOVAL A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 01 5000-2 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site weekly. C. If materials to be recycled or re -used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. D. Open free -fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids. 1.11 FIELD OFFICES A. Office: Weathertight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture. B. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 6 persons. C. Existing facility can be used for field office and meeting area. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 01 5000-3 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Re -use of existing products. B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. C. Product option requirements. D. Substitution limitations and procedures. E. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. C. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed, but not to be re -used, relocated, reinstalled, delivered to the Owner, or otherwise indicated as to remain the property of the Owner, become the property of the Contractor; remove from site. C. Reused Products: Reused products include materials and equipment previously used in this or other construction, salvaged and refurbished as specified., 2.02 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with industry standards. 2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 01 6000-1 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site and place in location directed by Owner's representative; obtain Owner's signature on receipt for delivery prior to final payment. Submit signed receipts with Closeout Submittals. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Substitutions Prior To Bid Opening: Architect will consider a written request for substitution provided that such request is received at least 6 days prior to the Bid opening date. Requests received after that time will not be considered. If a request is approved, the Architect will issue and appropriate addendum not less than 5 days prior to the Bid opening date. B. Substitutions After Notice of Award: Architect will consider a request for substitution only under one or more of the following conditions: 1. Substitution is required for compliance with final interpretation of code requirements or insurance regulations. 2. Specified product is not available through no fault of the Contractor. 3. Specified product is not compatible with other specified materials/equipment. 4. Manufacturer will not certify or warranty specified product as required. C. Document each request utilizing Substitution Request Form following this section with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. Incomplete requests will not be considered. D. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the some warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation arid make changes to other Work that maybe required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner for review or redesign services by Architect or associated with re -approval by authorities. E. Substitutions of products or product characteristics/components/accessories will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on Contractor's submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 01 6000-2 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved Documents, whether rejection of said subsititutions is expressly identified by Architect on Contractors submittals or not. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit two copies of request for substitution for consideration. Submit a separate Substitution Request Form and accompanying documentation for each proposed substitution. 2. Provide the following minimum documentation with each Substitution Request Form: a. Product identification, manufacturer, product data including dimensions and weight, performance and installation instructions. b. Side-by-side itemized comparison of proposed substitution with specified product. c. Coordination information including other modifications required as a result of proposed substitution. d. Cost information including the effect of the proposed substitution on the Contract Sum. 3. Sign and date the Substitution Request Form. 4. Architect will notify submitter in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. D. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. F.Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. 3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site O1 60 00 - 3 SECTION 01 60 00 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 3.11 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION A. See Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training. 3.12 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing. HVAC systems: See Section 23 05 93. 3.13 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment. 1. Clean areas to be occupied by Owner prior to final completion before Owner occupancy. B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. D. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment. E. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. F. Clean filters of operating equipment. G. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. H. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. I. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. J. Clean Owner -occupied areas of work. 3.14 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. See Section 01 77 00 for additional requirements. B. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. C. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. D. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's review. E. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with requirements for access to Owner -occupied areas. F. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete. G. Complete items of work determined by Architect's final inspection. 3.15 MAINTENANCE PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 01 7000-8 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections. B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is longer. C. Examine system components ata frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required.. D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component. E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12.172-743 01 7000-9 SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS CopyrightO 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Substantial Completion Procedures. B. Final Completion Procedures. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals. 1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Pre -Substantial Completion Conference: 1. General Contractor to schedule a Pre -substantial Completion Conference 15 days prior to the date of Substantial Completion, prepare an agenda with copies for the participants and preside over the meeting. 2. Attendance Required: General Contractor, Prime Contractors, major Subcontractors and.Suppliers (as mutually agreed upon), Architect/Engineer and Owner. 3. Minimum agenda: a. Schedule dates of Substantial Completion and Owner occupancy. b. Schedule dates for Initial Punch Lists of respective Subcontractors to be produced. c. Schedule date for written request for Substantial Completion. d. Schedule target date for completion of Initial Punch List items. e. Schedule delivery times for Owner furnished items to be installed by Contractor, Owners own forces or others under separate Contracts. f. Schedule dates for Demonstration and Training of equipment and systems specified. g. Schedule completion dates of testing and balancing reports for engineered Systems. h. Scheduling and Sequencing of Construction operations around areas partially occupied. i. Review job site security during transition of Owner occupancy. j. Schedule dates for final inspections from authorities having jurisdiction for Occupancy Permits. k. Review protocol for claims from potential move -in damage. I. Review procedures for final cleaning. m. Review potential concerns regarding environmental conditions. 4. Record minutes and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants and those affected by decisions made. B. Substantial Completion Procedures will be in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Article 9.8 and include the following: 1. When the Work or a portion of the Work is considered to be substantially complete, the Contractor inspects the project and prepares a comprehensive list of PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 01 7700-1 SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved outstanding items to be completed or corrected, Initial Punch List. 2. Contractor submits notice of Substantial Completion. 3. Contractor completes items on the Initial Punch List. 4. Architect inspects the project to verify substantial completion and prepares a Final Punch List. 5. Architect prepares Certificate of Substantial Completion, acceptance is required by Owner and Contractor. 1.04 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Final Completion Procedures will be in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Article 9.10, and include the following: 1. When items on Initial and Final Punch Lists are complete, the Contractor submits notice of final completion and final application for payment. 2. Contractor submits Final Closeout Submittals as specified in Section 01 78 00. 3. Architect inspects project and verifies the Work is acceptable and conforms with the Contract Documents. 4. Architect processes final application for payment and closeout submittals. 1.05 CORRECTION PERIOD A. Correction Period commences on the day of Substantial Completion and expires one year from that date. B. Owner: document non -conforming or defective work over course of Correction Period. Notify Contractor in writing of nonconforming or defective work. Copy Architect. 1. Life safety issues requiring immediate corrective work: Contact Contractor for action. C. Post Construction Walk Through: 1. Time: eleven months after the date of Substantial Completion convene a meeting on site. Attendees: Architect/Engineer, Owners Representative, End User and Maintenance Staff. 3. Minimum Agenda: a. Review Owners list of non -conforming or defective work. b. Conduct a walk through of the building and grounds c. Prepare a list of additional non -conforming or defective work items. 4. Architect/Engineer: a. Prepare written report of findings within two weeks of meeting. b. Notify Contractor of impending corrective work requiring action. c. Monitor execution of corrective Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED. PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 END OF SECTION 01 7700-2 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Warranties and bonds. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. C. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. D. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. 3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 day's prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection. C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 01 7800-1 SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved detrimental agents. 3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. d. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. J. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space for insertion of data. K. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Consultants, and Contractorwith name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume. 3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co -execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. E. Include originals of each in operation and maintenance manuals, indexed separately on Table of Contents. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 END OF SECTION 01 7800-4 CopyrightO 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS SECTION 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Demonstration of products and systems where indicated in specific specification sections. B. Training of Owner personnel in operation and maintenance is required for: 1. All software -operated systems. 2. HVAC systems and equipment. 3. Electrical systems and equipment. 4. Items specified in individual product Sections. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Training Plan: Owner will designate personnel to be trained; tailor training to needs and skill -level of attendees. 1. Submit to Architect for transmittal to Owner. 2. Submit not less than four weeks prior to start of training. 3. Revise and resubmit until acceptable. 4. Provide an overall schedule showing all training sessions. 5. Include at least the following for each training session: a. Identification, date, time, and duration. b. Description of products and/or systems to be covered. C. Name of firm and person conducting training; include qualifications. d. Intended audience, such as job description. e. Objectives of training and suggested methods of ensuring adequate training. f. Methods to be.used, such as classroom lecture, live demonstrations, hands-on, etc. g. Media to be used, such a slides, hand-outs, etc. h. Training equipment required, such as projector, projection screen, etc., to be provided by Contractor. C. Training Manuals: Provide training manual for each attendee; allow for minimum of two attendees per training session. 1. Include applicable portion of O&M manuals. 2. Include copies of all hand-outs, slides, overheads, video presentations, etc., that are not included in O&M manuals. 3. Provide one extra copy of each training manual to be included with operation and maintenance data. D. Training Reports: 1. Identification of each training session, date, time, and duration. 2. Sign -in sheet showing names and job titles of attendees. 3. List of attendee questions and written answers given, including copies of and references to supporting documentation required for clarification; include answers PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 01 79 00 - 1 SECTION 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved to questions that could not be answered in original training session. Video Recordings: Submit digital video recording of each demonstration and training session for Owner's subsequent use. 1. Format: DVD Disc. 2. Label each disc and container with session identification and date. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of the relevant products and systems. 1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment. 2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary qualifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DEMONSTRATION - GENERAL A. Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations for the purposes of this section, unless approved in advance by Owner. B. Demonstration may be combined with Owner personnel training if applicable. C. Operating Equipment and Systems: Demonstrate operation in all modes, including start-up, shut -down, seasonal changeover, emergency conditions, and troubleshooting, and maintenance procedures, including scheduled and preventive maintenance. 1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion. 2. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. D. Non -Operating Products: Demonstrate cleaning, scheduled and preventive maintenance, and repair procedures. 1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion. 3.02 TRAINING - GENERAL A. Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated. B. Owner will provide classroom and seating at no cost to Contractor C. Provide training in minimum two hour segments. D. Training schedule will be subject to availability of Owner's personnel to be trained; re -schedule training sessions as required by Owner; once schedule has been approved by Owner failure to conduct sessions according to schedule will be cause for Owner to charge Contractor for personnel "show -up" time. E. Review of Facility Policy on Operation and Maintenance Data: During training discuss: 1. The location of the O&M manuals and procedures for use and preservation; backup copies. 2. Typical contents and organization of all manuals, including explanatory information, system narratives, and product specific information. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 01 7900-2 SECTION 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 3. Typical uses of the O&M manuals. Product- and System -Specific Training: 1. Review the applicable O&M manuals. 2. For systems, provide an overview of system operation, design parameters and constraints, and operational strategies. 3. Review instructions for proper operation in all modes, including start-up, shut -down, seasonal changeover and emergency procedures, and for maintenance, including preventative maintenance. 4. Provide hands-on training on all operational modes possible and preventive maintenance. 5. Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements; discuss relevant health and safety issues and emergency procedures. 6. Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions. 7. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. 8. Discuss warranties and guarantees, including procedures necessary to avoid voiding coverage. 9. Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of manufacturers. 10. Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by Contractor. 11. Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures. G. Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees; if unable to answer during training session, provide written response within three days. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 01 7900-3 SECTION 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 02 41 00 DEMOLITION PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Handling and storage of items removed for salvage and relocation. B. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of removed products; temporary bracing and shoring. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition. B. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0l 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities and subsurface construction. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Company specializing in the type of work required. 1. Minimum of 3 years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCOPE A. Carefully remove portions of existing work as indicated on the drawings or as required to allow for the placement of new work. B. Remove other items indicated, for salvage, relocation, and recycling. C. Fill excavations, open pits, and holes in ground areas generated as result of removals, using specified fill; compact fill as required so that required rough grade elevations do not subside within one year after completion. 3.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with other requirements specified in Section 01 70 00. B. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public. 02 41 00 - 1 SECTION 02 41 00 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 DEMOLITION Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved I . Obtain required permits. 2. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 241. 3. Use of explosives is not permitted. 4. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures. 5. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 6. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public. 7. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants. 8. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit. 9. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations. C. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner. D. Do not begin removal until built elements to be salvaged or relocated have been removed. E. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. 1. Provide bracing and shoring. 2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. 3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. F. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution. G. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify Architect and Owner; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury. 3.03 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage. B. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7 days prior written notification to Owner. C. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if necessary. D. Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnected and abandoned utilities. 3.04 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown. 2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 0241 00-2 SECTION 02 41 00. DEMOLITION Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition. B. Separate areas in which demolition is being conducted from other areas that are still occupied. I . Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction specified in Section 01 50 00. C. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptionsrequired for replacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage. D. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace with new construction specified. 2. Remove items indicated on drawings. E. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, Telecommunications, and alerting system): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated. 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components. 2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. 3. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal. 4. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification. F. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. 4. Patch as specified for patching new work. 3.05 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site. B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. C. Cleanup spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 END OF SECTION 024100-3 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 02 41 00 DEMOLITION SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural steel framing members; support members. 1.02 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION: A. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Floor and roof frames, miscellaneous deck support elements. 1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005. B. AISC 5303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., 2005. C. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008. D. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2010. E. ASTM Al23/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2009. F. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. G. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2010. H. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010a. I. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 2007. J. AWS D1.1 /D1.1 M - Structural Wplding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0l 30 00 -Administrative Requirements; for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and fasteners. 2. Connections not detailed. 3. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 05 12 00 - 1 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved lengths. C. Submit data stating that shop and touch-up primers are compatible with final painting or any special coatings specified. See Section 09900 for finishes applied to ferrous metal surfaces. See Architectural drawings for finish schedule. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual." B. Design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a qualified Structural Engineer (SE) experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. C. Welder Qualifications: Qualified within previous 12 months in accordance with AWS. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Cold -Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. C. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B, Finish galvanized. D. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. E. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: Fabricator's option, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction, and compatible with scheduled finish paint, coating or fireproofing. F. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Fabricator's option, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction, and compatible with scheduled finish paint or coating specified in related Sections. G. Galvanized steel elements require galvanized bolts, nuts, washers, etc. to be installed. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible. B. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors. 2.03 FINISH A. Structural steel members can remain un -primed in areas concealed from view (i.e. elements concealed in walls, chases, ceilings, etc.) at fabricator's option. Coordinate locations with architectural drawings. B. Galvanize exterior exposed structural steel members to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. Provide minimum 1.7 oz/sq ft galvanized coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may properly proceed. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 05 1200-2 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 3.02 ERECTION A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". B. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. C. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect. D. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non -cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 114 inch. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide free access to framing operations at project site and cooperate with the appointed firm. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 05 12 00-3 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel items. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008. B. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2010. C. ASTM Al23/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2009. D. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2010. E. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010a. F. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2010. G. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010. H. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc -Rich Primers (Type I, 'Inorganic,' and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). I. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold -formed structural tubing. C. Plates: ASTM A 283. D. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 055000-1 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS E. Welding Materials: AWS D1 .1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded. F. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction; compatible with scheduled painted finish, coating or fireproofing specified in related Sections. G. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction; compatible with scheduled painted finish or coating specified in related Sections. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of some material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.03 FINISHES - STEEL A. Prime paint all steel items unless scheduled otherwise at the end of this section. 1. Exceptions: Galvanize all exterior steel. B. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. C. Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM Al23/A123M requirements. D. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM Al 23/A123M - requirements. 2.04 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 055000-2 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-structural dimension lumber'framing. B. Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings. C. Roofing noilers. D. Preservative treated wood materials. E. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 52 00 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing: Roofing membreane over roof blocking and cant strips. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. B. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood Protection Association; 2003. C. AWPA C9 - Plywood -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood Protection Association; 2003. D. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood Protection Association; 2010. E. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005. F. WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association; 2011. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. Species: Douglas Fir -Larch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 06 1000-1 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 3. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.aisc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Grading Agency: Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. C. Moisture Content: S -dry or MCI 9. D. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3, 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot -dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity and preservative -treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2.04 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 -Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Preservative -Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.25 Ib/cu ft retention. 1. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 15 percent. 2. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. 3. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete. 4. Treat lumber less than 18 inches above grade. 5. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Plywood Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC2 and UC3B, Commodity Specification F using waterborne preservative to 0.25 Ib/cu ft retention. a. Kiln dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 15 percent. b. Treat plywood in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. c. Treat plywood in contact with masonry or concrete. d. Treat plywood less than 18 inches above grade. C. Restrictions: Do not use lumber or plywood treated with chromated copper arsenate (CCA) in exposed exterior applications subject to leaching. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 061000-2 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.02 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking. C. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall -mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated. 3.03 ROOF -RELATED CARPENTRY A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and roofing assembly installation. B. Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are specified and where specifically indicated otherwise. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. 3.04 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site -sawn cuts, complying with manufacturer's instructions. B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 114 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum. 3.06 CLEANING A. Waste Disposal: 1. Comply with applicable regulations. 2. Do not burn scrap on project site. 3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated. 4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co -generation facilities or "waste -to -energy' facilities. B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 06 1000-3 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 3.07 SCHEDULES A. Roof Blocking: Pressure preservative treated. B. Blocking in Fire Rated Walls: Fire retardant treated. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 END OF SECTION 061000-4 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 07 01 50.19 PREPARATION FOR RE -ROOFING PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removal of existing roofing system in preparation for a new roof membrane system. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 50 00: Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary Roofing. B. Section 07 52 00: Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C208 - Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board; 2008a. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate with affected mechanical and electrical work associated with roof penetrations. B. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. C. Schedule work to coincide with commencement of installation of new roofing system. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials Removal Firm Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of documented experience. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not remove existing roofing membrane when weather conditions threaten the integrity of the building contents or intended continued occupancy. B. Maintain continuous temporary protection prior to and during installation of new roofing system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Temporary Protection: Sheet fiber reinforced plastic; provide weights to retain sheeting in position. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing roof surface is clear and ready for work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Sweep roof surface clean of loose matter. B. Remove loose refuse and dispose off site. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 07 01 50.19 - 1 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 07 01 50.19 PREPARATION FOR RE -ROOFING 3.03 MATERIAL REMOVAL A. Remove only existing roofing materials that can be replaced with new materials the some day. B. Remove metal counter flashings. C. Remove roofing membrane, perimeter base flashings, flashings around roof protrusions, pitch pans and pockets and as shown on drawings. D. Remove insulation and fasteners, cant strips, blocking. E. Remove vapor retarder, sheathing paper, and underlay. F. Repair existing steel deck surface to provide smooth working surface for new roof system. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The drawings identify the approximate limits to material removal. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Provide temporary protective sheeting over uncovered deck surfaces. B. Turn sheeting up and over parapets and curbing. Retain sheeting in position with temporary fasteners. C. Provide for surface drainage from sheeting to existing drainage facilities. D. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or repaired deck surface. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 07 01 50.19 - 2 SECTION 07 01 50.19 PREPARATION FOR RE -ROOFING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved - SECTION 07 46 19 STEEL SIDING PART] GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preformed metal siding system for walls. B. Related flashings. C. Accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2005. B. ASTM A 792/A 792M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55%Aluminum-Zinc Alloy -Coated by the Hot -Dip Process; 2006a. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Preformed and prefinished metal siding system of horizontal profile; site assembled. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0l 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures B. Product Data: Steel siding panels and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, layout, joints, construction details, and methods of anchorage. D. Samples For Calor Selection: Manufacturer's full color line. E. Samples For Verification: Submit two samples of siding, 12 by 12 inch in size illustrating Architect's selected finish color, sheen and texture. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum of 5 years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. B. Design Requirements: 1. Components: Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with local code. 2. Maximum Allowable Deflection of Panel: 1/180 of span. 3. Movement: Accommodate movement within system without damage to component or deterioration of seals, movement within system; movement between system and perimeter components when subject to seasonal temperature cycling; dynamic loading and release of loads; deflection of structural support framing. 4. Drainage: Provide positive drainage to exterior for moisture entering or condensing within panel system. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 0746 19- 1 SECTION 07 46 19 STEEL SIDING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Storage and Protection: 1. Protect panels from accelerated weathering by removing or venting sheet plastic shipping wrap. 2. Store prefinished material off ground protected from weather, to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. 3. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: 1. Correct defective Work within a five (5) year period after substantial completion for degradation of panel finish including color fading caused by exposure,to weather, water tightness and integrity of seals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Flexospan Steel Buildings, Inc.: www.flexospon.com. B. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation: www.meta]soles.us.com. C. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 SIDING PANELS A. Sheet Materials: ASTM A 792 steel, 20 gage, galvanized to coating designation G90, shop pre -coated with PVDF coating in selected color. 1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. B. Profile: Trapezoidal ribs on 7.2 inch centers; 11/2 inch rib height. C. Panel Coverage (Nominal Width): 36 inches. D. Fastening Method: Direct fastened with exposed fasteners. E. Product: 1. Flexospan - Flexbeam. 2: Metal Sales - IC72 Panel. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Flashings and Trim: Same material, gage and finish as siding panels, formed to required profiles. B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type to suit application; stainless steel, with soft neoprene washers; fastener cap same color as siding panels. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Form profiles true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 0746 19-2 SECTION 07 46 19 STEEL SIDING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved B. Form pieces in longest practicable lengths, to minimize endlaps. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that building substrate is ready to receive steel siding assembly. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install steel siding system on structural support provided by others in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.. Coordinate work with sheet metal flashing and trim work. C. Fasten siding to substrate; aligned, level and plumb. D. Locate joints over supports. Lap panel ends minimum 6 inches. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Tolerances: 1. Maximum Offset From True Alignment Between Adjacent Members Butting or In -Line: 1/16 inch. 2. Maximum Variation from Plane or Location Indicated on Drawings: 1/8 inch. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces. B. Clean and wash prefinished surfaces with mild soap and water; rinse with clean water. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 0746 19-3 SECTION 07 46 19 STEEL SIDING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 07 52 00 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Modified bituminous roofing membrane, conventional application. B. Insulation, flat and tapered. C. Base flashings. D. Roofing cant strips, accessories, and cover board. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Counterflashings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C726 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Roof Insulation Board; 2012. B. ASTM C728 - Standard Specification for Perlite Thermal Insulation Board; 2005 (Reapproved 2010). C. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocya n u rate Thermal Insulation Board; 2012. D. ASTM C 1549 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Solar Reflectance Near Ambient Temperature Using a Portable Solar. E. ASTM D3960-92: VOC emissions of asphalt based, cold adhesives. F. ASTM D4601 /D4601 M - Standard Specification for Asphalt -Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet Used in Roofing; 2004 (Reapproved 2012)el. G. ASTM D5147 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials. H. ASTM D6223 - Standard Specification for Atactic Polypropylene (APP) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using a Combination of Polyester and Glass Fiber Reinforcements; 2002 (Reapproved 2009). I. ASTM D6509 - Standard Specification for Atactic Polypropylene (APP) Modified Bituminious Base Sheet Materials Using Glass Fiber Reinforcements. J. ASTM E408 - Standard Test Methods for Total Normal Emittance of Surfaces Using Inspection -Meter Techniques. K. ASTM El 980 - Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low -Sloped Opaque Surfaces; 2011. L. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. M. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 07 52 00 - 1 SECTION 07 52 00 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING Copyright© 2014by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved N. Factory Mutual Standard 4470 - Approval Standard for Class 1 Roof Covers. O. Federal Specification #HH -1-1972 - Faced polyisocyanurate roof insulation board. P. Membrane Immersion Test - Modified Bitumen Membrane Asphaltic Impregnation Evaluation, as published in the "Proceedings of the Fourth International Symposium on Roofing Technology". Q. NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates. R. NBS-BSS #55 - Tensile strength for fully adhered, asphalt based roof systems. S. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. T. UL (RMSD) - Roofing Materials and Systems Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D1079 and the glossary of the National Roofing Contractors Association (NBCA) Roofing and Waterproofing Manual for definitions of roofing terms related to this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog data for membrane and bitumen materials, base flashing materials, insulation, and surfacing. 1. LEED Submittal: Include testing documentation of solar reflectance index. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate joint or termination detail conditions, conditions of interface with other materials, and setting plan for tapered insulation. D. Manufacturer's qualification data. E. Installer's qualification data. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. G. Warranty: Existing roofing membrane is under 20 year manufacturer warranty; installed in 1996. Maintain existing Derbigum Americas, Inc. warranty at affected areas of roof work. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer's instructions. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.07 DESIGN/PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide an installed roofing membrane and base flashing system that does not permit PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 075200-2 SECTION 07 52 00 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved the passage of water, and will withstand the design pressures calculated in accordance with the most current revision of ASCE 7. B. Perform work in accordance with all federal, state and local codes. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels intact. B. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture; ballast materials may be stored outdoors. C. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. D. Store rolled goods on end on pallets in a clean, dry, protected area. Do not double stack modified bitumen products. E. Store and dispose of hazardous materials, and materials contaminated by hazardous materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufactuer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.10 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a two year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Existing roofing membrane is under 20 year manufacturer warranty; installed in 1996. Maintain existing Derbigum Americas, Inc. warranty at affected areas of roof work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. DERBIGUM Americas, Inc., which is located at: 4800 Blue Pkwy.; Kansas City, MO 64130; Toll Free Tel: 800-727-9872; Tel: 816-921-0221; Fax: 816-924-1542; www.derbigum.us B. Substitutions: See Section, 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 ROOFING -CONVENTIONAL APPLICATION A. Where located on the Drawings, install a new roof system consisting of a multiple ply modified bitumen membrane system installed in cold adhesive or by heat welding, with new sheet metal flashing and trim as indicated. B. Where located on the Drawings, remove and properly dispose of the existing roof membrane, base flashings, roof insulation, and sheet metal flashing and trim. Install a new roof system consisting of new rigid roof insulation, a multiple ply modified bitumen membrane system installed in cold adhesive, and new sheet metal flashing and trim. Roof system must match existing installed application. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 07 52 00.3 SECTION 07 52 00 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved C. Roofing Assembly Requirements: 1. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI): 78, minimum, calculated in accordance with ASTM E1980, based on 3 -year aged data. a. Field applied coating may not be used to achieve specified SRI. 2.03 MODIFIED BITUMINIOUS MEMBRANE A. Derbigum XPS-FR: ASTM D 6223.Type I fire resistant, triple reinforced, smooth surfaced Atactic Polypropylene (APP) membrane with fiberglass mat and glass and polyester composite mat. 1. Thickness: 160 mils (4mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 77 degrees F (MD/XD): 120 Ibf / 140 Ibf. 3. Elongation at 77 degrees F (MD/XD): 5.0 percent / 5.0 percent. 4. Tear Resistance at 77 degrees F (MD/XD): 225 / 245. 5. Low Temperature Flex: minus 20 degrees C. B. Flexible Flashing Material: Some material as membrane. 2.04 INSULATION A. Composite Board Insulation: Top layer high-density wood fiberboard (HDF), bottom layer polyisocyanurate, complying with ASTM C1289, and with the following characteristics: 1. Polyisocyanurate surfaces faced with glass fiber mat. 2. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. 3. Board Thickness: 1-1 /2 inches. Total minimum thickness of base layers to equal 3 inch thickness plus tapered insulation thickness to match existing. 4. Tapered Board: Slope as indicated; minimum thickness 1/4 inch; fabricate of fewest layers possible. 5. Thermal Resistance: R -value of 5.5 per inch of thickness. 6. Board Edges: Square. 7. Manufacturers: a. Atlas Roofing Corporation; ACFoam Composite/FB and Tapered ACFoam Composite/FB: www.atiasroofing.com. 8. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Cant and Edge Strips: Asphalt -impregnated wood fiberboard, compatible with roofing materials; cants formed to 45 degree angle, tapered edge strips, and other configurations as detailed. B. Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by roofing manufacturer. 1. Length as required for thickness of insulation material and penetration of deck substrate, with metal washers. C. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 075200-4 SECTION 07 52 00 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved B. Verify deck is supported and secure. C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped and suitable for installation of roof system. D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. E. Verify that roof openings, curbs; and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and cant strips are in place. F. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. G. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install all roofing systems system components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSULATION INSTALLATION - CONVENTIONAL APPLICATION A. Do not apply roof insulation until all other Work which requires foot equipment traffic on the roof. B. Securely attach insulation to the roof deck using the required fastener density and pattern as listed in the current Derbigum Specifications and Details Guide. A minimum FM 1-90 attachment is recommended. C. Do not install wet, damaged or warped insulation boards. D. Install insulation boards with staggered board joints in one direction (unless taping joint). E. Install insulation boards snug. Gaps between board joints must be less than 1/4 inch (6 mm). Fill all gaps in excess of 1/4 inch (6 mm) with insulation material of the same type. F. Wood Nailers: Install minimum 3-1/2 inch (89 mm) wide nailers at all locations indicated on the Drawings. Nailers must be of equal thickness as the insulation with a minimum 1 inch (25 mm) and securely fastened to the deck. G. Install cant strips at the transition between roof deck and wall/curb surfaces in all. membrane flashing applications. Where necessary to accommodate differential movement between the wall and roof deck, vertical wood nailers, of sufficient height to provide a minimum 8 inch (203mm) base flashing height, may be mechanically fastened to the insulation stops in accordance with NRCA recommendations and the Drawings. H. Miter and fill the edges of the insulation boards at ridges, valleys and other changes in place to prevent open joints and irregular surfaces. Avoid breaking or crushing of the insulation at the corners. I. Do not install insulation over old lightweight insulating concrete decks without the use of a vapor retarder. J. Do not install any more insulation than will be completely waterproofed each day. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 075200-5 SECTION 07 52 00 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved K. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof. L. Do not apply more insulation than can be covered with membrane in same day. 3.04 BASE/INTERPLY INSTALLATION A. Apply approved base sheets over insulation or deck surfaces using methods approved by the manufacturer for the specified roof system. B. Apply approved interply sheets over appropriate base sheets using methods approved by the manufacturer for the specified roof system. C. Strap and backnail base and interply sheets where roof slopes exceed 2 inches per foot (2:12). 3.05 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Apply roof system in strict accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. B. Unroll membranes and allow them to relax prior to application. Application of sheet materials directly from the factory roll may increase the incidence of wrinkling during or subsequent to application. C. Starting at the low point of the roof area, unroll membrane into position with 3 inch (76mm) side laps and end laps staggered a minimum of 12 inches (305mm). D. Heat -Welded Membrane Application: 1. Installation substrate must be clean, smooth and dry. Do not apply membrane directly to a fresh asphalt glaze or flood coat, or over previous plies with excessive asphalt bleed out at laps. 2. On slopes less than 3/4 inch per foot (62 mm per meter), install membrane perpendicular to the slope. 3. On slopes 2 inch per foor (62 mm per meter) and over, install membrane parallel to the roof slope and back nailed in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines. 4. Install full width cap sheets, lapping 3 inches (76 mm) on the sides and 6 inches (152 mm) on ends. Stagger adjacent end laps a minimum of 18 inches (457 mm) apart. Stagger all side and end laps from previous plies. 5. Unroll membrane approximately 10 feet (3000 mm), and align. Apply uniform heat across the exposed back surface of the membrane and lap areas until the compound reaches the proper application temperature and exhibits a slight sheen. Avoid overheating, which may cause poor adhesion or damage the membrane. Slowly unroll the membrane as heat is applied. 6. Re -roll the opposite end of the membrane and install in the some manner. E. Side and End Laps: 1. Heat weld side and end 2. laps of the modified bituminous membrane using hot air welding equipment. Roll with a 20 pound steel roller while the bitumen is still warm. Edge of the lap must be untooled, with a continous bead of bitumen visible at the seam. 3.06 MEMBRANE BASE FLASHING A. Maximum flashing length is 10 feet (3.05 m) when the membrane flashings are PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 075200-6 SECTION 07 52 00 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved between 8 inches (203 mm) and 14 inches (356 mm) high. B. Priming: Prime all metal surfaces with asphalt primer and allow them to dry prior to applicaiton of the flashing membrane. C. Stripping Plies: 1. At metal flanges, install a stripping ply over the field base ply, extending a minimum of 4 inches (102 mm) beyond the flange of the metal. 2. Set the metal flange over the stripping ply in a bed of PerFlash flashing cement and mechanically anchor. 3. Apply top ply over the primed metal flange. 4. Where the edge of stripping plies meets the metal detail (i.e., outside edge of perimter metal or against vent pipes), apply a bead of Perflash flashing cement to provide a continuous seal and fill in any gaps that may allow standing water at this point. D. High Wall Flashings: When flashing vertical surfaces above 14 inches (356 mm) high, the membrane must be installed the width of the roll and pre-cut to the desired height. E. Seal the top edges of all base flashings with asphalt flashing cement and reinforcing fabric to provide protection until metal counter flashing is installed. F. Curb and Corner Flashings: 1. All inside and outside corners require a boot to provide weather protection at the lap joint. Boot must be a minimum 2 inch (51 mm) radius beyond all intersecting surfaces, and have a minimum of 1/4 inch (6 mm) follow of modified bitumen beyond all edges. 2. Install boots at the inside and outside corners (underneath) prior to installing the flashing membrane. 3. In lieu of Derbigum membrane boots, the corners may be reinforced with a five -course treatment, consisting of alternating layers of Perflash and glass fabric mesh. G. Mechanically fasten the top of all vertical base flashing membranes. Install fasteners appropriate to the substrate 8 inches (203 mm) on center.. H. Metal Counter Flashing: All vertical base flashings must be covered by metal counter flashing to form a continuous water shedding surface over the top of membrane flashing. Extend metal counter flashing a minimum of 3 inches (76 mm) over the top of the membrane flashing. I. Metal Face Securement: Install Hook strips (cleats) on all metal extending over roof edges (coping metal, gravel stop/eave strip, perimeter curb metal, etc.) in accordance with the recommendations in the NRCA Roofing and Waterpoofing Manual. Appropriate provision must be made in accessory metal to allow for expansion and contraction of the metal sections without interrupting the integrity of the waterproofing assembly. J. Roof Drains: 1. All roof drains must be Bumped and free of all rust, debris and dirt. 2. Install the base ply and cut so that the base ply stops short of the clamping ring. 3. Install a 36 inch square piece of smooth membrane over the drain opening, in PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 075200-7 SECTION 07 52 00 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for the roof system specified. Cut a hole to the inside edge of the drain base. 4. Thoroughly clean the drain bowl flange, and prime to receive the membrane. Apply Perflash to the clamping ring area. 5. Install a 30 inch (762mm) square, 4 Ib (1.81 kg) lead flashing over the membrane into a bed of Perflash cement and install the top layer of field membrane extending to the inside edge of the drain bowl. 6. The field membrane, the new drain lead, and stripping membrane are to extend under the properly secured and tightened compression clamping ring assembly. Cut holes in the membrane to align with the clamping bolts, install the clamping ring and tighten the bolts to provide uniform compression of the flashing membrane at the drain. K. Pitch Pockets: 1. Fabricate and install new pitch pockets from galvanized steel in accordance with NRCA recommendations. 2. Fill the pocket halfway to the top with non -shrink grout and the remainder with pourable sealer or Perflash. 3. Slope fill away from the penetration to the end of the pocket. 4. Install metal rain collars with drawbands that cover and overlap the entire pocket and caulk the top of the drawband with sealant. 5. Strip in the metal flanges of the pitch pocket per the sequence described above for stripping plies. 3.07 INSPECTION AND QUALITY CONTROL A. The roofing system manufacturer shall provide a qualified, trained auditor to perform a final inspection to insure the roof system has been installed properly and according to the manufacturer's recommendations and guaranty requirements. Upon completion of the inspection, copies of the inspection report will be provide to the Architect and Contractor. Any corrective action deemed necessary to comply with the manufacturer's specifications must be completed prior to final close-out. 3.08 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect new roof system during remainder of construction period. Plan work so traffic over new roof system is kept to a minimum. Where traffic must continue over new roof system, provide protection for the finished roof. B. Provide protection for masonry and other building surfaces against damage of staining from roofing operations. Any surfaces damaged or stained as a result of roofing operations shall be cleaned, repaired or replaced as necessary by the roofing contractor. C. Job site shall be maintained in a clean, orderly fashion, and free of debris. Store materials and equipment so operations of building are not interrupted. D. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 075200-8 SECTION 07 52 00 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved . SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings and counterflashings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers. B. Section 07 52 00 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing: Roofing system. C. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2005. B. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2007. C. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2007. D. ASTM D4479 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Coatings - Asbestos -Free; 2007. E. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. .Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Pre -Finished Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M); 0.032 inch thick; plain finish shop pre -coated with fluoropolymercoating. 1. Fluoropolymer Coating: High Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing metal. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 07 62 00 - 1 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved B. Primer: Zinc chromate type. C. Protective Backing Paint: Asphaltic mastic, ASTM D 4479 Type I. D. Sealant: Type S-5 specified in Section 07 90 05. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate, in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form drip. G. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing membrane. Return and brake edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. B. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. C. Seal metal joints watertight. 3.04 SCHEDULE A. Coping, Cap, Parapet, Sill and Ledge Flashings: 1. Material: Pre -Finished Aluminum. 2. Thickness: 0.050 inch. 3. Finish: Fluoropolymer Coating. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 076200-2 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 076200-3 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Firestopping systems. B. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire -resistance rated and smoke -resistant assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated. C. Smoke -stopping of all penetrations of and joints in smoke partitions, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Fire Stops; 2011 a. B. FM 4991 - Approval of Firestop Contractors; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; 2001. C. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.agmd.gov. D. UL (FPD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Assembly: Particular arrangement of materials specific to given type of construction described or detailed in referenced documents. B. Barriers: Time rated fire walls, smoke barrier walls, time rated ceiling/floor assemblies and structural floors. C. Firestopping: Methods and materials applied in penetrations and unprotected openings to limit spread of heat, fire gasses and smoke. D. Penetration: Opening or foreign material passing through or into barrier or structural floor such that full thickness of rated materials is not obtained. E. Joint: Interruption to a fire -rated assembly occurring at interface between 1) adjacent sections of wall, 2) intersecting walls, 3) top of wall and ceiling, structural floor or roof deck, 4) wall and edge of structural floor, 5) adjacent sections of structural floor. F. System: Specific products and applications, classified and numbered by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. to close specific barrier penetrations and joints. G. Sleeve: Metal fabrication or pipe section extending through thickness of barrier and used to permanently guard penetration. Sleeves are described as part of penetrating system in other sections and may or may not be required. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Fire -rated construction: Maintain barrier and structural floor fire resistance ratings 07 84 00 - 1 SECTION 07 84 00 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 FIRESTOPPING Copyright© 2014 by,KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Firestopping systems. B. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire -resistance rated and smoke -resistant assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated. C. Smoke -stopping of all penetrations of and joints in smoke partitions, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Fire Stops; 2011 a. B. FM 4991 - Approval of Firestop Contractors; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; 2001. C. SCAQMD 1 168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov. D. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Assembly: Particular arrangement of materials specific to given type of construction described or detailed in referenced documents. B. Barriers: Time rated fire walls, smoke barrier walls; time rated ceiling/floor assemblies and structural floors. C. Firestopping: Methods and materials applied in penetrations and unprotected openings to limit spread of heat, fire gasses and smoke. D. Penetration: Opening or foreign material passing through or into barrier or structural floor such that full thickness of rated materials is not obtained. E. Joint: Interruption to a fire -rated assembly occurring at interface between 1) adjacent sections of wall, 2) intersecting walls, 3) top of wall and ceiling, structural floor or roof deck, 4) wall and edge of structural floor, 5) adjacent sections of structural floor. F. System: Specific products and applications, classified and numbered by'Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. to close specific barrier penetrations and joints. G. Sleeve: Metal fabrication or pipe section extending through thickness of barrier and used to permanently guard penetration. Sleeves are described as part of penetrating system in other sections and may or may not be required. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Fire -rated construction: Maintain barrier and structural floor fire resistance ratings PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 078400-1 SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved including resistance to cold smoke at all penetrations, connections with other surfaces or types of construction, at separations required to permit building movement and sound or vibration absorption, and at other construction gaps. 2. Smoke barrier construction: Maintain barrier and structural floor resistance to cold smoke at all penetrations, connections with other surfaces and types of construction and at all separations required to permit building movement and sound or vibration absorption, and at other construction gaps. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section O1 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly, and firestopping test or design number. 1. Provide manufacturer's qualified engineering judgements for non-standard applicaitons. C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings when tested in accordance with methods indicated. 1. Listing in the current -year classification or certification books of UL will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report. 2. Submission of actual test reports is required for assemblies for which none of the above substantiation exists. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and: 1. Approved by Factory Mutual Research under FM Standard 4991, Approval of Firestop Contractors. 2. With minimum 3 years documented experience installing work of this type. 3. Able to show at least 5 satisfactorily completed projects of comparable size and type. , 4. Licensed by authority having jurisdiction. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in original, unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification. B. Coordinate delivery with scheduled installation date to minimize storage time at site. C. Store materials in a clean, dry, ventilated location. Protect materials from freezing if required by manufacturer. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 078400-2 SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials. B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent -cured materials are being installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements. 1. Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM E814 that has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and T Rating Equal to F Rating and that meets all other specified requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Firestopping Sealants: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. B. Accepatable Manufacturers: As listed in UL (FRD) for specific UL Design Number. C. Fill, Void or Cavity Materials: Conform to UL (FRD) - XHHW. D. Firestop Devices: Conform to UL (FRD) - XHJI. E. Forming Materials: Conform to UL (FRD) - XHKU. F. Mechanical Joint Assemblies: Conform to UL (FRD) - XHLP. G. Packing Material: As required by specific UL Design Number for joint system or through -penetration firestop system. H. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section. 1. Verify barrier joints and penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application of materials. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that could adversely affect bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in manner described in UL (FRD) or fire test report and in accordance with manufacturers instructions, completely closing openings. 078400-3 SECTION 07 84 00 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743FIRESTOPPING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials. B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent -cured materials are being installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements. 1. Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM E814 that has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and T Rating Equal to F Rating and that meets all other specified requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Firestopping Sealants: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168. B. Accepatable Manufacturers: As listed in UL (FRD) for specific UL Design Number. C. Fill, Void or Cavity Materials: Conform to UL (FRD) - XHHW. D. Firestop Devices: Conform to UL (FRD) - XHJI. E. Forming Materials: Conform to UL (FRD) - XHKU. F. Mechanical Joint Assemblies: Conform to UL (FRD) - XHLP. G. Packing Material: As required by specific UL Design Number for joint system or through -penetration firestop system. H. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section. 1. Verify barrier joints and penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application of materials. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that could adversely affect bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in manner described in UL (FRD) or fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 078400-3 SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having jurisdiction. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. B. Patch or replace firestopping damaged by work of other sections. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 078400-4 SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Joint sealants and joint backing. B. Control joint fillers. C. Expansion joint sealers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic sealant. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2009. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with other sections referencing this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section O1 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics. C. Samples: Submit samples, 2 inch in size illustrating sealant colors for selection. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum 10 years experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.07 MOCK-UP A. Construct mock-up with specified sealant types and with other components noted. B. Locate where directed. C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Section 0l 78 00 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. 07 90 05 - 1 SECTION 07 90 05 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 JOINT SEALERS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. BASF Construction Chemicals -Building Systems: www.chemrex.com. B. Bondaflex Technologies: www.bondaflex.com. C. Bostik, Inc.: www.bostik-us.com. D. Dow Corning Corporation: www.dowcorning.com. E. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. F. Substitutions: See Section O1 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 JOINT SEALANTS A. Compatibility: I. Provide joint sealants, joint fillers and accessory joint materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under project conditions. 2. Install joint sealants, joint fillers and related joint materials that are non -staining to visible joint surfaces and surrounding substrate surfaces. B. Sealant Type S-1: 1. For interior and exterior joints (that will not be painted) in vertical surfaces and non -traffic horizontal surfaces such as, but not limited to: a. Control and expansion joints in cast -in-place concrete. b. Joints between architectural pre -cast concrete units. c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. d. Butt joints between metal panels. e. Joints between marble and/or granite. f. Joints between different materials listed above. g. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows, storefronts, louvers and similar openings. h. Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces. i. between metal thresholds or sheet metal seems 2. Provide single-component.or multi-component, low -modulus, non -sag sealant; comply with ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class +50/-50, Class +100/-50 3. Acceptable Products: a. BASF Sonolostic 150 Tint Base b. Bondaflex Technologies Sil 290 FPS -NB c. Bondaflex Technologies Sil 295 FPS -NB d. Pecora 890 FTS e. Dow 790 4. Color: Custom colors to match Architect's samples of adjacent substrates. C. Sealant Type S-2: 1. For interior joints (that will be painted) in vertical surfaces and non -traffic horizontal surfaces such as, but not limited to: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 079005-2 SECTION 07 90 05 JOINTSEALERS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved b. Perimeter joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior openings. c. Joints on pre -cast beams and planks. d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, storefronts, louvers, elevator entrances and similar openings. e. Trim or finish joints subject to movement. f. Sheet metal seems and metal threshholds 2. Acceptable Products: a. Bondaflex Technologies PUR 25 b. Pecora DynatrolIXL c. Bostik Chemcaulk 915 D. Sealant Type S-3: 1. For exterior and interior joints (that will not be painted) in horizontal and sloped traffic surfaces such as, but not limited to: a. Control expansion and isolation joints in cast -in-place concrete. b. Control expansion and isolation joints in structural pre -cast concrete units. c. Joints between architectural pre -cast concrete paving units. d. Tile control and expansion joints. e. Joints between different materials listed above. 2. Provide single -component silicone sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade P or NS, Class 100/50. 3. Acceptable Products: a. Bondaflex Technologies Sil 728 NS b. Bondaflex Technologies Sil 728 SL c. Pecora 301 NS or 300 SL d. Dow 888 or 890 E. Sealant Type S-4: 1. For exterior and interior joints (that will not be painted) in vertical and horizontal surfaces of potable water storage or incidental food contact areas. 2. Provide single -component or multi-component polyurethane sealant certified by National Sanitation Foundation as conforming to the requirements of NSF Standard 61 -Drinking Water System Components -Health Effects; comply with ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade P or NS, Class 25; select color from the NSF listing. 3. Acceptable Products: a. Bondaflex Technologies Sil 100 GP b. Bondaflex Technologies SIL 100 WF c. Pecora 898 d. Dow 786 ACCESSORIES 1. Joint cleaner: Cleaner as recommended by sealant manufacturer for substrates indicated. 2. Joint primer: As recommended by sealant manufacturer for substrates, conditions and exposures indicated. 3. Bond breaker: Polyethylene tape or other adhesive faced tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer to prevent sealant contact where it would be detrimental to sealant performance. 07 90 05 - 3 SECTION 07 90 05 PROJECT N0.12-172-743 JOINT SEALERS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 4. Joint backer: Closed cell, open cell polyurethane, non -gassing polyolefin or soft rod polyethylene foam rod or other compatible non -waxing, non -extruding, non -staining resilient material in dimension 25 percent to 40 percent wider than joint width as recommended by sealant manufacturer for conditions and exposures indicated. 5. Masking tape: Non -staining, non-absorbent tape product compatible with joint sealants and adjacent joint surfaces that is suitable for masking. G. OTHER MATERIALS 1. Provide other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor and approved by the sealant manufacturer as compatible, subject to review of the Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation Of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1 193. C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width -to -depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G. Tool joints concave. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect sealants until cured. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 079005-4 SECTION 07 90 05 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved JOINT SEALERS END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 079005-5 SECTION 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS CopyrightO 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal stud wall framing. B. Gypsum wallboard. C. Joint treatment and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2002 (Reapproved 2007). B. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2009a. C. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2009a. D. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2008. E. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2010. F. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self -Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2007. G. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base; 2010a. H. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2009a. I. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2000 (Reapproved 2005). J. GA -216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2010. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. , See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing and acoustic seals. C. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system. D. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing compliance with requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 0921 16- 1 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and finishing, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA -216. 2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories: 1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com. 2. Marino\Ware: www.marinoware.com. 3. The Steel Network, Inc: www.SteeiNetworl(.com. 4. Tracloc North America; Product Trokloc: www.traklocmw.com. 5. Substitutions: Not permitted. B. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; sheet steel galvanized to G60 class, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf. 1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs. 2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. 3. Ceiling Channels: C shaped. 4. Furring: Hat -shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch. C. Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and screwed to secondary deflection channel set inside but unattached to top track. 2.03 BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturers - Gypsum -Based Board: 1. American Gypsum: www.americangypsum.com. 2. CerfainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC: www.gp.com/gypsum. 4. Lafarge North America Inc: www.fafargencrthamerica.com. 5. National Gypsum Company: www.nationaigypsum.com. 6. USG Corporation: www.usg.com. 7. Substitutions: Not permitted. B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper -faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch. b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch. c. Curved Surfaces: 2 layers of 1/4 inch. d. Multi -Layer Assemblies: Thicknesses as indicated on drawings. C. Backing Board For Non -Wet Areas: Water-resistant gypsum backing board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimum joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Vertical surfaces behind thinset tile, except in wet areas. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 0921 16-2 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 2. Moisture Resistance: Less than 5% water absorbtion. 3. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 4. Type: Regular, in locations indicated. 5. Regular Board Thickness: 5/8 inch. 6. Edges: Tapered. D. Ceiling Board: Special sag -resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Edges: Tapered. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Sealant: Non -hardening, non -skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board. B. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. 2. Special Shapes: In addition to conventional cornerbead and control joints, provide U -bead at exposed panel edges. 3. Manufacturers - Finishing Accessories: a. Same manufacturer as framing materials. C. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Ready -mixed vinyl -based joint compound. D. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness, to Wood Members, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self -piercing tapping type; cadmium -plated for exterior locations. E. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 Inch in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members at 16 inches on ter cen . 1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200. 2. Laterally brace entire suspension system. C. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center. 1. Extend partition framing to structure in all locations. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 092116-3 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 09,21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 2. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain clearance between top of studs and structure; and brace both flanges of studs with continuous bridging. 3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Single -Layer Non -Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 1. Exception: Tapered edges to receive joint treatment at right angles to framing. C. Fire -Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly listing. D. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. 1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long. B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. 3.05 JOINTTREATMENT A. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows: 1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed construction. B. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. 2. Taping, filling and sanding is not required at base layer of double layer applications. C. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended by manufacturer. 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 0921 16-4 SECTION 09 21 16 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical units. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling. B. Section 26 51 10 - Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings; 2007. B. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels; 2008. C. ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2011. D. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2008e1. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components. C. Samples: Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical units. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Acoustical Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 09 51 00- 1 SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid -height at substrate surface. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Supply 1 gallon of each color; store where directed. C. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Paints and Coatings: Any manufacturer listed in MPI Approved Products List (at www.paintinfo.com) under applicable MPI product reference number, unless otherwise indicated. B. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions. C. Provide all paint and coating products from the some manufacturer to the greatest extent possible. D. In the event that a single manufacturer cannot provide all specified products, minor exceptions will be permitted provided approval by Architect is obtained using the specified procedures for substitutions. 1. Substitution of MPI -approved products by a different manufacturer is preferred over substitution of unapproved products by the same manufacturer. 2. Substitution of a different system using MPI -approved products by the same manufacturer will be considered. E. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS - GENERAL PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 099000-2 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved A. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1 . Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D --National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. b. Architectural coatings VOC limits of the State in which the Project is located. 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to.a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited: 1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate, di -n -butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2 -dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate., dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1 -trichloroethane, vinyl chloride. C. Paints and Coatings: Provide products listed in Master Painters Institute Approved Product List, current edition available at www.paintinfo.com, for specified MPI Categories, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Provide ready mixed paints and coatings, except field -catalyzed coatings. 2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. D. Patching Material: Latex filler. E. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS A. Provide Premium Grade systems (2 top coats) as defined in MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual, except as otherwise indicated. B. Where a specified paint system does not have a Premium Grade, provide Custom Grade system. C. Where a specified paint system does not have a Custom Grade, provide Premium Grade system. D. Where sheen is not specified or more than one sheen is specified, sheen will be selected later by Architect from the manufacturer's full line. E. Provide colors as directed by Architect. 1. Allow for minimum of three colors for each system, unless otherwise indicated, without additional cost to Owner. 2.04 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications: PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 099000-3 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING I . Shop -primed steel doors and frames, and other shop -primed items for which no other finish is specified: a. Pl : EXT 5.1A Quick Dry Enamel: 1 coat Q.D. Primer MPI #76, 2 coats Q.D. Enamel MPI #81, semi -gloss. b. Painting contractor confirm compatability of specified system with primed finish on shop -primed items prior to application of system. B. Galvanized Metal, Not Chromate Passivoted: 1. Lintels, and other exterior galvanized items for which no other finish is specified: a. P2: EXT 5.3H Latex: 1 coat W.B. Primer MPI #134, 2 coats W.B. Latex MPI #11, semi -gloss. 2. Railings, handrails, access ladders, equipment platforms, un -primed steel doors and frames: a. P3: EXT 5.3L Pigmented Polyurethane (over epoxy primer) (High Contact/Traffic): 1 coat Epoxy Primer MPI #101, 2 coats Polyurethane MPI #72. 2.05 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Surfaces for which no other finish is specified: a. Contractor's option: 1) P5: INT 4.2D High Performance Architectural Latex: 1 coat Latex Block Filler MPI #4, 2 coats HIPAC Latex MPI #141, gloss level 5. 2) P5: INT 4.2E Institutional Low Odor/VOC: 1 coat Latex Block Filler MPI #4, 2 coats Institutional Low Odor/VOC MPI #147, gloss level 5. 2. Surfaces in toilet rooms, shower areas and locker room areas: a. Contractor's option: 1) P6: INT 4.2G Epoxy, W.B.: 1 coat Epoxy Block Filler MPI #116, 2 coats Epoxy MPI #77, gloss. 2) P6: INT 4.2S Epoxy, H. B.: 1 coat Epoxy Block Filler MPI #116, 2 coats Epoxy High Build MPI #98, gloss. B. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications: 1. Painting contractor confirm compatability of specified systems with primed finish on shop -primed items prior to application of systems. 2. Shop -primed steel items including: columns, metal fabrications, doors and frames: a. P8: INT 5.1 R High Performance Architectural Latex: 1 coat Alkyd Metal Primer MPI #76 or 79 (over shop -applied primer), 2 coats HIPAC Latex MPI #141, gloss level 5. C. Gypsum Board: ' 1. Walls, ceilings, soffits and bulkheads, and surfaces for which no other finish is specified: a. Contractor's option: 1) INT 9.213 High Performance Architectural Latex: 1 coat Latex Primer Sealer MPI #50, 2 coats HIPAC Latex MPI #138, 139, 140 or 141, as scheduled on Drawings. (a) P10: #138, Gloss level 2, velvet. (b) PI 1: #139, Gloss level 3, eggshell. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 099000-4 SECTION 09 90 00 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved PAINTING AND COATING (c) Pil: #140, Gloss level 4, satin. 2) INT 9.2M Institutional Low Odor/VOC: 1 coat Latex Primer Sealer MPI #149, 2 coats Institutional Low Odor/VOC MPI #143, 144, 145, 146, 147 or 148, as scheduled. (a) P10: #144, Gloss level 2, velvet. (b) PI 1: #145, Gloss level 3, eggshell. (c) P11: #146, Gloss level 4, satin. Gypsum and plaster ceilings in shower and locker room areas: a. P13: INT 9.2N Epoxy High Build Low Gloss: 1 coat Latex Sealer MPI #50, 2 coats Epoxy High Build #108, Gloss level 3, eggshell. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCOPE -- SURFACES TO.BE FINISHED t where cated not to be pointed or to emain A Paint natural; the term "exposed" exposed surfaces includes areas visible through permanent and rbuilt-in fixtures when they are in place. B. Paint the surfaces described in PART 2, indicated on the Drawings, and as follows: 1. If a surface, material, or item is not specifically mentioned, paint in the same manner as similar surfaces, materials, or items, regardless of whether colors are indicated or not. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furnishings the same as similar exposed surfaces. 3. Paint surfaces to be concealed behind permanently installed fixtures, equipment, and furnishings, using primer only, prior to installation of the permanent item. 4. Paint all mechanical, gas piping and electrical equipment, including that which is factory -finished, exposed to weather or to view on the roof and outdoors. 5. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. 6. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets with flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers, grilles, or louvers. 7. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. C. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory -finished unless specifically noted; factory -primed items are not considered factory -finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finish. 3. Items indicated to remain naturally finished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Anodized aluminum. 6. Polished and brushed stainless steel items. 7. Brick, precast concrete, integrally colored plaster. 8. Acoustical materials. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product manufacturer. 09 90 00 - 5 SECTION 09 90 00 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 PAINTING AND COATING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat will not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. 5. If manufacturer's instructions recommend sanding to produce a smooth, even surface, sand between coats. 6. Before applying next coat vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. B. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from site. C. Protect other work, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting as approved by Architect. D. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in MPI Manual. This requirement is in addition to number of coats specified in individual systems. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved V' DIE . SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING SECTION 22 10 05 PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems. 1. Domestic water. 2. Gas. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011. B. ASME 816.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2012 (ANSI 816.1 B). C. ASME 816.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2010). D. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011 (ANSI/ASME B31.9). E. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012. F. ASTM Al23/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012. G. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008. H. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009. I. MSS SP -58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2009. J. MSS SP -78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011. K. MSS SP -110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket -Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2010. L. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. 22 1005- 1 SECTION 22 10 05 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 PLUMBING PIPING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type L (B), Drawn (H). 1. Fittings: ASME B7 6.18, cast copper alloy or ASME 616.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder. 3. Press Fittings: ASME B16.18 or ASME 816.22 copper and copper alloy. IAPMO PS 117, performance criteria. Sealing elements for press fittings shall be EPDM. Sealing elements shall be factory installed by fitting manufacturer. Press ends shall have means to indicate non pressed fitting during pressure testing. a. Manufacturers: 1) Nibco. 2) Viega. 2.02 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type. 2. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ASME 831.1. 2.03 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under: 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions. B. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch: 1. Ferrous pipe; Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2.04 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP -58. 1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using MSS SP -58 recommendations. 2. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze hangers. 3. Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure. 4. Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp. 5. Rooftop Supports for Low -Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with bases that rest on top of roofing membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 221005-2 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 22 10 05 PLUMBING PIPING penetrating the roofing assembly, with support fixtures as specified; and as follows: a. Bases: High density polypropylene. b. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing assembly. c. Steel Components: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot -dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM Al23/A123M. d. Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type as indicated for equivalent indoor hangers and supports; corrosion resistant material. e. Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches under pipe to top of roofing. B. Plumbing Piping - Gas: 1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1 swivel, split ring. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and 2.05 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Conbraco Industries. 2. Nibco,lnc. 3. Milwaukee Valve Company. 1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. B. Construction, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP -1 10, Class 150,400 psi CWP, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, solder ends. 2.06 PLUG VALVES A. Manufacturers: B. Up to and including 2 Inches (50 mm): bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non -lubricated, teflon packing, screwed ends. C. Construction. 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP -78, 175 psi CWP, cast iron body and plug, pressure lubricated, teflon or Buna N packing, flanged ends. Provide lever operator with set screw. 2.07 PLUMBING INSULATION A. Insulation: ASTM C547; rigid molded fiberglass, noncombustible. 1. 'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. 4. Cold water pipe insulation shall be 1 -inch thick." PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over -excavated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 22 1005-3 SECTION 22 10 05 PLUMBING PIPING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide non -conducting dielectric.connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. G. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies. H. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09 90 00. I. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. J. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather proof hood. K. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. 2. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 3. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 4. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 5. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. b. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. B. Install gate or ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. C. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service. 3.05 SCHEDULES A. Pipe Hanger Spacing: 1. Metal Piping: a. Pipe size: 1/2 inches to 1-1/4 inches: PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 221005-4 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 22 10 05 PLUMBING PIPING 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 6.5 ft. 2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inches. o. Pipe size: 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches: 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft. 2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch. C. Pipe size: 2-1/2 inches to 3 inches: 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft. 2) Hanger rod diameter: 1/2 inch. END OF SECTION 22 10 05 - 5 SECTION 22 10 05 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 - PLUMBING PIPING CopyrightO 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 6.5 ft. 2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inches. b. Pipe size: 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches: 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft. 2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch. c. Pipe size: 2-1/2 inches to 3 inches: 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft. 2) Hanger rod diameter: 1/2 inch. END OF SECTION 22 10 05 - 5 SECTION 22 10 05 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 PLUMBING PIPING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems. B. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AABC MN -1 - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance; Associated Air Balance Council; 2002. B. ASHRAE Std 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air -Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1988, with 1997 Errata. C. NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems; National Environmental Balancing Bureau; 2005, Seventh Edition. D. SMACNA (TAB) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2002. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to be followed and the specific approach for each system and component. 1. Include at least the following in the plan: a. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency measurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters, formulas to be used. b. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment to be tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each. c. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and piping drawings during the process. d. Final test report forms to be used. e. Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and distribution. B. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. 1. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report. 2. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for Architect and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. 3. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of calibration. 4. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 23 05 93 - 1 SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved report format use that; otherwise, follow ASH RAE Std 111. 5. Units of Measure: Report data in I -P (inch -pound) units only. 6. Include the following on the title page of each report: a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency, b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. d. Project name. e. Project location. f. Project Architect. g. Project Engineer. h. Project Contractor. i. Report date. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following: 1. AABC MN -1, AABC National Standards for Total System Balance. 2. ASHRAE Std 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air -Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems. 3. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems. 4. SMACNA HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. B. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete work prior to Substantial Completion of the project. C. Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with life safety systems, including fire and smoke detection, alarm, and control, coordinate scheduling and testing and inspection procedures with the authorities having jurisdiction. D. TAB Agency Qualifications: I . Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section. 2. Certified by one of the following: a. AABC, Associated Air Balance Council: www.aabchq.com; upon completion submit AABC National Performance Guaranty. b. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau: www.nebb.org. c. TABB, The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy Management Institute: www.tabbcertified.org. E. TAB Supervisor Qualifications: Certified by same organization as TAB agency. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions: 1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 230593-2 SECTION 23 05 93 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, to final filters. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Fans are rotating correctly. 7. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 8. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are 9. Air outlets are installed and connected. 10. Duct system leakage is minimized. install temporary media in addition in place. B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies that will or could prevent proper system balance. C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to Architect to facilitate spot checks during testing. B. Provide additional balancing devices as required. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems. B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. 3.05 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. E. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report. 3.06 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities at site altitude. B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. . C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 23 05 93 -3 SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved objectionable drafts and noise. E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. G. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. H. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions. I. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. J. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure near the building entries. 3.07 SCOPE A. Test, adjust, and balance the following: 1. Packaged Roof Top Heating/Cooling Units 2. Fans 3. Air Filters 4. Air Inlets and Outlets END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reservec 2305 93 -4 SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC SECTION 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Duct insulation. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010. B. ASTM C553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2008. C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2010b. D. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010. E. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006. F. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section, with minimum three years of experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723. 2.02 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 23 07 13- 1 SECTION 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved A. Manufacturer: 1. Knauf Fiber Glass. 2. Johns Manville Corporation. 3. Owens Corning Corp. 4. CertainTeed Corporation. B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 1. 'K' value: 0.25 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F. 3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight. C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.04 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. D. Vapor Barrier Tape: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. E. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 END OF SECTION 230713-2 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION SECTION 23 22 13 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and pipe fittings. B. Valves. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 84 15 - Steam Humidifiers 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME 616.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2012 (ANSI B16.18). B. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2010). C. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2010 (ANSI/ASME B31.1). D. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011 (ANSI/ASME B31.9). E. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008. F. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009. G. ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2005. H. MSS SP -58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2009. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Use unions and flanges downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Use dielectric unions where joining dissimilar materials. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections. B. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.9 unless indicated otherwise. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ASME B31.9 and ASME 831.1 code for installation of piping system. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labelling in place. Inspect for damage. B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2322 13- 1 SECTION 23 22 13 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved C. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LOW PRESSURE STEAM PIPING (15 PSIG MAXIMUM) A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A), drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME Bl 6.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22 wrought copper. 2. Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B 32, HB alloy (95-5 tin -antimony), or tin and silver. 2.02 LOW PRESSURE STEAM CONDENSATE PIPING A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type L (B), drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME 816.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22, wrought copper. 2. Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B 32, HB alloy (95-5 tin -antimony), or tin and silver. 2.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP -58. 1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using MSS SP -58 recommendations. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Pipe Sizes to 4 inches: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. D. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. 2.04 UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS A. Unions for Pipe 2 Inches and Under: 1. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints. B. Flanges for Pipe Over 2 Inches: 1. Copper Piping: Bronze. 2.05 BALL VALVES A. Up To and Including 2 Inches: 1. Bronze one piece body, chrome plated bass ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle with balancing stops, solder ends with union. B. Over 2 Inches: 1. Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle, or gear drive handwheel for sizes 10 inches and over, flanged. 2.06 PIPE INSULATION A. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded fiberglass, noncombustible. 1. 'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2322 13 -2 SECTION 23 22 13 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved '.. 4. Insulation Schedule: a. Low Pressure Steam Pipe: 1-1 /2". b. Low Pressure Condensate Pipe: 1-1/2". PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Whenever work is suspended during construction protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps. E. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. Refer to Section 23 25 00. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space and avoid interference with use of space. D. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. E. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9. F. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Hanger Spacing for Copper Tubing. 1. 1/2 inch and 3/4 inch: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2, 1 inch: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. 1-1/2 inch and 2 inch: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. 2-1/2 inch: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. 3 inch: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. END OF SECTION 23 22 13-3 SECTION 23 22 13 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal ductwork. B. Duct cleaning. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 07 13 - Duct Insulation: External insulation and duct liner. B. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories. C. Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASHRAE (FUND) - ASHRAE Handbook - Fundamentals; 2009. B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008. C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2010. D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2010b. E. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air -Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2012. F. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers. B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel for Ducts: Hot -dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M FS Type B, with G90/Z275 coating. B. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non -hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant. 1. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration and compatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2331 00-1 SECTION 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved for pressure class of ducts. 2. VOC Content: Not more than 250 g/L, excluding water. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of zero, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. C. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. D. All Ducts: Galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated. E. Low Pressure Supply (System with Cooling Coils): 2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel. Return and Relief: 2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel. G. Ductmate or WDCI duct connection systems are acceptable. Ductwork constructed using these systems shall refer to manufacturer's recommendations for sheet metal gage intermediate and joint reinforcement. H. Interior gaskets for flanged connections shall be Ductmate 440 butyl rubber. I. Combustion Air: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel. 2.02 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. B. No variation of duct configuration or size permitted except by written permission. Size round duct installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE Handbook - Fundamentals. C. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. D. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide air foil turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. E. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. F. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. G. Where ducts are connected to exterior wall louvers and duct outlet is smaller than louver frame, provide insulated blank -out panels sealing louver area around duct. Use same material as duct, painted black on exterior side; seal to louver frame and duct. 2.03 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS A. Flexible Ducts: Multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by helically wound spring steel wire. 1. Insulation: Fiberglass insulation with aluminized vapor barrier film. 2. Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG positive and 1.0 inches WG negative. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2331 00-2 SECTION 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 3. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. 4. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 210 degrees F. SMACNA "E" rated rigidly class connection, B. Transverse Duct Connection System. gasket, cleats and interlocking angle and duct edge connection system with sealant, corner clips. 1. Manufacturers: 2.04 DUCTWORK INSULATION A. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible fiberglass blanket. 1. 'K' value: 0.25 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F. 3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight. B. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.04 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. C. Insulation Schedule: 1. Supply air ductwork: 1-1 /2". 2. Returnairductwork: 1-1/2". PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. D. Flexible Ducts: Connect to metal ducts with mechanical fastener E. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. F. Duct sizes indicated shall be of sizes indicated. However, necessary changes in shape offsets or crossovers to clear piping, lighting, building construction obstructions, etc. shall be made without additional cost. G. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. H. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. 23 31 00 - 3 SECTION 23 31. 00 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved I. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. J. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts with 5 feet maximum length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp. K. At exterior wall louvers, seal duct to louver frame and install insulated blank off panel. 3.02 CLEANING A. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment that could be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 END OF SECTION 2331 00-4 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Air turning devices/extractors. B. Duct access doors. C. Duct test holes. D. Flexible duct connections. E. Volume control dampers. 1.02 'RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air -Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2012. B. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005, 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS A. Multi -blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. 2.02 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Acudor Products Inc. 2. Ruskin Company. 3. Vent Products. B. Fabrication: Rigid and close -fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ducts, install minimum 1 inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. 1. Larger Sizes: Provide an additional hinge. C. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. 2.03 DUCT TEST HOLES A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill inducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist -on metal caps. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 23 33 00 - 1 SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved B. Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation. 2.04 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. B. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. 1. Fabric: UL listed fire -retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd. 2.05 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ruskin Company, 2. Greenheck. 3. Air Balance. 4. Vent Products. B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. C. End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil -impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. D. Quadrants: 1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi -blade dampers. 2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 23 31 00 for duct construction and pressure class. B. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. C. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to the equipment. D. At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to the equipment. E. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 END OF SECTION 233300-2 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES SECTION 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Diffusers. B. Registers/grilles. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2006.- 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0l 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Price Industries. B. Titus. C. Tuttle & Bailey. 2.02 SQUARE CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Type: Provide square, stamped, multi -core diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern. B. Connections: As scheduled on drawings. C. Frame: Provide inverted T -bar type. D. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel finish. E. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. F. Accessories: Provide radial opposed blade volume control damper; removable core with damper adjustable from diffuser face. G. Titus Model TMS. 2.03 PERFORATED FACE CEILING RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Type: Perforated face. . PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 23 37 00 - 1 SECTION 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved B. Frame: Inverted T -bar type. C. Fabrication: Steel with steel frame and baked enamel white finish. D. Color: As selected by Architect with manufacturer's standard range. E. Titus Model PAR. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 233700-2 SECTION 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 23 74 13 PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS PART 1 GENERAL I' 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Packaged roof top unit. B. Unit controls. C. Remote panel. D. Roof mounting curb and base. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 06 20.26 - Wiring Connections: Installation and wiring of thermostats and other controls components; wiring from unit terminal strip to remote panel. B. Section 26 06 20.26 - Wiring Connections: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AHRI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment; Air -Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2008. B. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air -Conditioning and Ventilation Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2012. C. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings for Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. D. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook E. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes. F. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louver, Dampers and Shutters. G. AHRI 340/360 - Unitary Large Equipment. H. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators. National Electrical Code. J. NFPA 70 - National Fire Protection Agency. K. SMACNA - HVAC Dust Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.. L. UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide capacity and dimensions of manufactured products and assemblies required for this project. Indicate electrical service with electrical characteristics and connection requirements, and duct connections. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate capacity and dimensions of manufactured products and PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2374 13 - 1 SECTION 23 74 13 PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved assemblies required for this project. Indicate electrical service with electrical characteristics and connection requirements, and duct connections. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include start-up instructions. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation, instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Filters: One set for each unit. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect units from physical damage by storing off site until roof mounting curbs are in . place, ready for immediate installation of units. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section O1 78 00 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide a five year warranty to include coverage for refrigeration compressors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PACKAGED ROOF TOP UNITS A. Manufacturers: I. McQuay International. 2. Valent 3. Acton. General Description 1. Furnish as shown on plans, single zone Heating and Cooling Unit. Unit performance and electrical characteristics shall be per the job schedule. 2. Configuration: Fabricate as detailed on prints and drawings: a. Return plenum / economizer section b. Filter section c. Cooling coil section d. Supply fan section e. Gas heating section f. Condensing unit section. 3. The complete unit shall be cETLus listed. 4. Each unit shall be specifically designed for outdoor rooftop application and PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 23 74.13 -2 SECTION 23 74 13 PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved include a weatherproof cabinet. Each unit shall be completely factory assembled and shipped in one piece. Packaged units shall be shipped fully charged with R-410 Refrigerant and oil. 5. The unit shall undergo a complete factory run test prior to shipment. The factory test shall include a refrigeration circuit run test, a unit control system operations checkout, a unit refrigerant leak test and a final unit inspection. 6. All unit shall have decals and. tags to indicate caution areas and aid unit service. Unit nameplate shall be fixed to the main control panel door. Electrical wiring diagrams shall be attached to the control panels. Installation, operating and maintenance bulletins and start-up forms shall be supplied with each unit. 7. Performance: All scheduled EER, IEER, capacities and face areas are minimum accepted values. All scheduled amps, kW, and HP are maximum accepted values that allow scheduled capacity to be met. 8. Warranty: The manufacturer shall provide 12 -month parts only warranty. Defective parts shall be repaired or replaced during the warranty period at no charge. The warranty period shall commence at startup or six months after shipment, whichever occurs first. C. Cabinet, Casing and Frame 1. Panel construction shall be double-wall construction for all panels. All floor panels shall have a solid galvanized steel inner liner on the air stream side of the unit to protect insulation during service and maintenance. Insulation shall be a minimum of V thick with an R -value of 7.0, and shall be 2 part injected foam. Panel design shall include no exposed insulation edges. Unit cabinet shall be designed to operate at total static pressures up to 5.0 inches w.g. 2. Exterior surfaces shall be constructed of pre -painted galvanized steel for aesthetics and long term durability. Paint finish to include a base primer with a high quality, polyester resin topcoat of a neutral beige color. Finished panel surfaces to withstand a minimum 750 -hour salt spray test in accordance with ASTM 13117 standard for salt spray resistance. 3. Service doors shall be provided on the fan section, filter section, control panel section, and heating vestibule in order to provide user access to unit components. All service access doors shall be mounted on multiple, stainless steel hinges and shall be secured by a latch system. Removable service panels secured by multiple mechanical fasteners are not acceptable. 4. The unit base shall overhang the roof curb for positive water runoff and shall seat on the roof curb gasket to provide a positive, weathertight seal. Lifting brackets shall be provided on the unit base to accept cable or chain hooks for rigging the equipment. D. Economizer Section l . Unit shall be provided with an outdoor air economizer section. The economizer section shall include outdoor, return, and exhaust air dampers. The economizer operation shall be fully integral to the mechanical cooling and allow up to 100% of mechanical cooling if needed to maintain the cooling discharge air temperature. The outdoor air hood shall be factory installed and constructed from galvanized steel finished with the same durable paint finish as the main unit. The hood shall include moisture eliminator filters to drain water away from the entering air system. The outside and return air dampers shall be sized to handle 100% of PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 - 2374 13-3 SECTION 23 74 13 PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved the supply air volume. The dampers shall be parallel blade design. Damper blades shall be gasketed with side seals to provide an air leakage rate of 4 cfm / square foot of damper area at 1" differential pressure per ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Standard. A barometric exhaust damper shall be,provided to exhaust air out of the back of the unit. A bird screen shall be provided to prevent infiltration of rain and foreign materials. Exhaust damper blades shall be lined with vinyl gasketing on contact edges. Control of the.dampers shall be by a factory installed direct coupled actuator. Damper actuator shall be of the modulating, spring return type. A comparative enthalpy control shall be provided to sense and compare enthalpy in both the outdoor and return air streams to determine if outdoor air is suitable for "free" cooling. If outdoor air is suitable for "free" cooling, the outdoor air dampers shall modulate in response to the unit's temperature control system. E. Exhaust Fan 1. Exhaust fan shall be a single width, single inlet (SWSI) airfoil centrifugal fan. The fan wheel shall be Class II construction with aluminum fan blades that are continuously welded to the hub plate and end rim. The exhaust fan shall be a direct drive fan mounted to the motor shaft. 2. The fan motor shall be a totally enclosed EC motor that is speed controlled by the rooftop unit controller. The motor shall include thermal overload protection and protect the motor in the case of excessive motor temperatures. The motor shall have phase failure protection and prevent the motor from operation in the event of a loss of phase. Motors shall be premium efficiency. 3. Fan assembly shall be a slide out assembly for servicing and maintenance. 4. The unit DDC controller shall provide building static pressure control. The unit controller shall provide proportional control of the exhaust fans from 25% to 100% of the supply air fan designed airflow to maintain the adjustable building pressure setpoint. The required sensing tubing shall be field installed from the building to the factory mounted building static pressure sensor. F. Filters 1. Unit shall be provided with a draw -through filter section. The filter rack shall be designed to accept a 2" prefilter and a 4" final filter. The unit design shall have a hinged access door for the filter section. The manufacturer shall ship the rooftop unit with 2" construction filters. The contractor shall furnish and install, at building occupancy, the final set of filters per the contract documents. G. Cooling Coil 1. The indoor coil section shall be installed in a draw through configuration, upstream of the supply air fan. The coil section shall be complete with a factory piped cooling coil and an ASHRAE 62.1 compliant double sloped drain pan. 2. The direct expansion (DX) cooling coils shall be fabricated of seamless high efficiency copper tubing that is mechanically expanded into high efficiency aluminum plate fins. Coils shall be a multi -row, staggered tube design with a minimum of 3 rows. All cooling coils shall have an interlaced coil circuiting that keeps the full coil face active at all load conditions. All coils shall be factory leak tested with high pressure air under water. 3. The cooling coil shall have an electronic controlled expansion valve. The unit controller shall control the expansion valve to maintain liquid subcooling and the PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 23 74 13-4 SECTION 23 74 13 PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved superheat of the refrigerant system. 4. The refrigerant suction lines shall be fully insulated from the expansion valve to the compressors. 5. The drain pan shall be stainless steel and positively sloped. The slope of the drain pan shall be in two directions and compy with ASHRAE Standard 62.1. The drain pan shall have a minimum slope of 1/8" per foot to provide positive draining. The drain pan shall extend beyond the leaving side of the coil. The drain pan shall have a threaded drain connection extending through the unit base. H. Hot Gas Reheat 1. Unit shall be equipped with a fully modulating hot gas reheat coil with hot gas coming from the unit condenser. 2. Hot gas reheat coil shall be a Micro Channel design. The aluminum tube shall be a micro channel design with high efficiency aluminum fins. Fins shall be brazed to the tubing for a direct bond. The capacity of the reheat coil shall allow for a 20°F temperature rise at all operating conditions. 3. The modulating hot gas reheat systems shall allow for independent control of the cooling coil leaving air temperature and the reheat coil leaving air temperature. The cooling coil and reheat coil leaving air temperature setpoints shall be adjustable through the unit controller. During the dehumidification cycle the unit shall be capable of 100% of the cooling capacity. The hot gas reheat coil shall provide discharge temperature control within +/- 2°F. 4. Each coil shall be factory leak tested with high-pressure air under water. Supply Fan 1. Supply fan shall be a single width, single inlet (SWSI) airfoil centrifugal fan. The fan wheel shall be Class II construction with aluminum fan blades that are continuiously welded to the hub plate and end rim. The supply fan shall be a direct drive fan mounted to the motor shaft. 2. Fan assembly shall be a slide out assembly for servicing and maintenance. 3. All fan assemblies shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory, including a final trim balance, prior to shipment. 4. The fan motor shall be a totally enclosed EC motor that is speed controlled by the rooftop unit controller. The motor shall include thermal overload protection and protect the motor in the case of excessive motor temperatures. The motor shall have phase failure protection and prevent the motor from operation in the even of a loss of phase. Motors shall be premium efficiency. 5. The supply fan shall be capable of airflow modulation from 30% to 100% of the scheduled designed airflow. The fan shall not operate in a state of surge at any point within the modulation range. Heating Section 1. The rooftop unit shall include a natural gas heating section. The gas furnace design shall be one natural gas fired heating module factory installed downstream of the supply air fan in the heat section. The heating module shall be a tubular design with in -shot gas burners. 2. Each module shall have two stages of heating control. The module shall be complete with furnace controller and control valve capable of 10:1 modulating operation, PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 23 74 13-5 SECTION 23 74 13 PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved I The heat exchanger tubes shall be constructed of stainless steel. 4. The module shall have an induced draft fan that will maintain a negative pressure in the heat exchanger tubes for the removal of the flue gases. 5. Each burner shall have two flame roll-out safety protection switches and a high temperature limit switch that will shut the gas valve off upon detection of improper burner manifold operation. The induced draft fan shall have an airflow safety switch that will prevent the heating module from turning on in the event of no airflow in the flue cleaner. 6. The factory -installed DDC unit control system shall control the gas heat module. Field installed heating modules shall require a field ETL certification. The manufacturer's rooftop unit ETL certification shall cover the complete unit including the gas heating modules. K. Condensing Section 1. Outdoor coils shall have seamless copper tubes, mechanically bonded into aluminum plate -type fins. The fins shall have full drawn collars to completely cover the tubes. A sub -cooling coil shall be an integral part of the main outdoor air coil. Each outdoor air coil shall be factory leak tested with high-pressure air under water 2. Fan motors shall be an ECM type motor for proportional control. The unit controller shall proportionally control the speed of the condenser fan motors to maintain the head pressure of the refrigerant circuit from ambient condition of 0--1257. Mechanical cooling shall be provided to 252 F. The motor shall include thermal overload protection and protect the motor in the case of excessive motor temperatures. The motor shall have phase failure protection and prevent the motor from operation in the event of a loss of phase. 3. The condenser fan shall be low noise blade design. Fan blade design shall be a dynamic profile for low tip speed. Fan blade shall be of a composite material. 4. The unit shall have scroll compressors. One of the compressors shall be an inverter compressor providing proportional control. The unit controller shall control the speed of the compressor to maintain the discharge air temperature. 5. Pressure transducers shall be provided for the suction pressure and head pressure. Temperature sensor shall be provided for the suction temperature and the refrigerant discharge temperature of the compressors. All of the above devices shall be an input to the unit controller and the values be displayed at the unit controller. 6. Refrigerant circuit shall have a bypass valve between the suction and discharge refrigerant lines for low head pressure compressor starting and increased compressor reliability. When there is a call for mechanical cooling the bypass valve shall open to equalizing the suction and discharge pressures. When pressures are equalized the bypass valve shall close and the compressor shall be allowed to start. 7. Each circuit shall be dehydrated and factory charged with R-41OARefrigerant and oil. L. Electrical 1. Unit wiring shall comply with NEC requirements and with all applicable UL standards. All electrical components shall be UL recognized where applicable. All wiring and electrical components provided with the unit shall be number and color -coded and labeled according to the electrical diagram provided for easy PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 23 74 13-6 SECTION 23 74 13 PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved identification. The unit shall be provided with a factory wired weatherproof control panel. Unit shall have a single point power terminal block for main power connection. A terminal board shall be provided for low voltage control wiring. Branch short circuit protection, 115 -volt control circuit transformer and fuse, system switches, and a high temperature sensor shall also be provided with the unit. Each compressor and condenser fan motor shall be furnished with contactors and inherent thermal overload protection. Supply fan motors shall have contactors and external overload protection. Knockouts shall be provided in the bottom of the main control panels for field wiring entrance. 2. A single non-fused disconnect switch shall be provided for disconnecting electrical power at the unit. Disconnect switches shall be mounted internally to the control panel and operated by an externally mounted handle. M. Controls 1. Provide a complete integrated microprocessor based Direct Digital Control (DDC) system to control all unit functions including temperature control, scheduling, monitoring, unit safety protection, including compressor minimum run and minimum off times, and diagnostics. This system shall consist of all required temperature sensors, pressure sensors, controller and keypad/display operator interface. All MCBs and sensors shall be factory mounted, wired and tested. 2. The stand-alone DDC controllers shall not be dependent on communications with any on-site or remote PC or master control panel for proper unit operation. The microprocessor shall maintain existing set points and operate stand alone if the unit loses either direct connect or network communications. The microprocessor memory shall be protected from voltage fluctuations as well as any extended power failures. All factory and user set schedules and control points shall be maintained in nonvolatile memory. No settings shall be lost, even during extended power shutdowns. 3. The DDC control system shall permit starting and stopping of the unit locally or remotely. The control system shall be capable of providing a remote alarm indication. The unit control system shall provide for outside air damper actuation, emergency shutdown, remote heat enable/disable, remote cool enable/disable, heat indication, cool indication, and fan operation. 4. All digital inputs and outputs shall be protected against damage from transients or incorrect voltages. All field wiring shall be terminated at a separate, clearly marked terminal strip 5. The DDC controller shall have a built-in time schedule. The schedule shall be programmable from the unit keypad interface. The schedule shall be maintained in nonvolatile memory to insure that it is not lost during a power failure. There shall be one start/stop per day and a separate holiday schedule. The controller shall accept up to sixteen holidays each with up to a 5 -day duration. Each unit shall also have the ability to accept a time schedule via BAS network communications. b. The keypad interface shall allow convenient navigation and access to all control functions. The unit keypad/display character format shall be 4 lines x 20 characters. All control settings shall be password protected against unauthorized changes. For ease of service, the display format shall be English language readout. Coded formats with look -up tables will not be accepted. The user interaction with the display shall provide the following information as a minimum: PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 23 74 13 PACKAGED Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 23 74 13 OUTDOOR CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS a. Return air temperature. b. Discharge air temperature. c. Outdoor air temperature. d. Space air temperature. e. Outdoor enthalpy, high/low. f. Compressor suction temperature and pressure g. Compressor head pressure and temperature h. Expansion valve position i. Condenser fan speed j. Inverter compressor speed k. Dirty filter indication. I. Airflow verification. m. Cooling status. n. Control temperature (Changeover). o. Cooling status/capacity. p. Unit status. q. All time schedules. r. Active alarms with time and date. s. Previous alarms with time and date. t. Optimal start U. Supply fan and exhaust fan speed. v. System operating hours. 1) Fan 2) Exhaust fan 3) Cooling 4) Individual compressor . 5) Heating 6) Economizer 7) Tenant override The user interaction with the keypad shall provide the following: a. Controls mode 1) Off manual 2) Auto 3) Heat/Cool 4) Cool only 5) Heat only 6) Fan only b. Occupancy mode 1) Auto 2) Occupied 3) Unoccupied 4) Tenant override c. Unit operation changeover control 1) Return air temperature 2) Space temperature 3) Network signal d. Cooling and heating change -over temperature with deadband e. Cooling discharge air temperature (DAT) PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2374 13 -8 SECTION 23 74 13 PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved f. Supply reset options 1) Return air temperature 2) Outdoor air temperature 3) Space temperature 4) Airflow (VAV) 5) Network signal 6) External (0-10 vdc) 7) External (0-20 mA) g. Temperature alarm limits 1) High supply air temperature 2) Low supply air temperature 3) High return air temperature h. Lockout control for compressors. i. Compressor interstage timers j. Night setback and setup space temperature. k. Building static pressure. I. Economizer changeover 1) Enthalpy m. Currently time and date n. Tenant override time o. Occupied/unoccupied time schedule p. One event schedule q. Holiday dates and duration r. Adjustable set points s. Service mode 1) Timers normal (all time delays normal) 2) Timers fast (all time delays 20 sec) 8. Space sensor shall be provided. Space sensors shall be available to support field selectable features. Sensor options shall include: a. Zone sensor with tenant override switch plus heating and cooling set point adjustment. (Space Comfort Control systems only) 9. To increase the efficiency of the cooling system the DDC controller shall include a discharge air temperature reset program for part load operating conditions. The discharge air temperature shall be controlled between a minimum and a maximum discharge air temperature (DAT) based on one of the following inputs: a. Airflow b. Outside air temperature c. Space temperature d. Return air temperature e. External signal of 1-5 vdc f. External signal of 0-20 mA g. Network signal N. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION - all components and devices shall be provided as required to meet sequences of operat 1. The occupied/unoccupied mode scheduling shall be made at the remote keypad. 2. The supply fan shall run continuously during occupied mode and intermittently during unoccupied mode. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 23 74 13-9 SECTION 23 74 13 PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 3. The exhaust fan shall modulate based as required to maintain the space static pressure setpoint. 4. During occupied mode the outside air dampers shall open to the minimum outside air cfm setpoint. An economizer shall modulate the capers based on differential enthalpy to maintain a cooling supply air temperature setpoint. 5. Roof top unit control shall modulate cooling compressor and modulating burner as required to maintain space temperature. 6. Upon detection of smoke in the supply or return air the fans shall be de -energized, outside dampers closed, signal alarm locally and at fire alarm panel. 2.02 CURBS A. Curbs to be fully gasketed between the curb top and unit bottom with the curb providing full perimeter support, cross structure support and air seal for the unit. Curb gasket shall be furnished within the control compartment of the rooftop unit to be mounted on the curb immediately before mounting of the rooftop unit. B. Knockdown curbs (with duct support rails) shall be factory furnished for field assembly. C. Solid bottom curb shall be factory assembled and fully lined with 1 inch neoprene coated fiberglass insulation and include a wood nailer strip. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that proper power supply is available. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mount units on factory built roof mounting curb providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and utility services. Install roof mounting curb level. C. Provide p -trap on condensate drain outlets and pipe to nearest roof drain. 3.03 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Prepare and start equipment. Adjust for proper operation. 3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Demonstrate operation to Owner's maintenance personnel. 3.05 MAINTENANCE A. Provide service and maintenance of packaged rooftop units for one year year from Date of Substantial Completion. B. After each service call, submit copy of service call work order or report that includes description of work performed. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 23 74 13- 10 SECTION 23 74 13 PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL -STATION AIR -HANDLING UNITS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 23 84 15 STEAM HUMIDIFIERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrode Steam Humidifiers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 06 20.26 - Wiring Connections: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AHRI 610 - Performance Rating of Central System Humidifiers for Residential Applications; Air -Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide catalog data indicating rated capacity, dimensions, duct and service connections, electric nameplate data and wiring diagrams. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of system and components. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions and recommendations. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Extra Humidifier Cylinders: One of each type and size. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section O1 78 00 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide two year manufacturer warranty for humidifier unit except the cylinder. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Nortec; Model NHTC. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2384 15 - 1 SECTION 23 84 15 STEAM HUMIDIFIERS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved B. Armstrong International, Inc. C. Dri-Steem Humidifier Company. 2.02 ELECTRODE STEAM HUMIDIFIERS A. Humidifier: Self contained, disposable cylinder, microprocessor controlled electrode steam generating unit; complying with AHRI 610. B. The electrode steam generating system uses a portable water supply, C. Packaged unit, wall mounted, mineral free atmospheric pressure steam generation using an electrode steam cylinder(s). Resistive element technology and boiler system (pressure steam) technology not acceptable. D. Unit(s) to be complete with: 1. Advanced water management utilizing the patented Porportional plus Integral Auto -adaptive control system for optimal energy efficiency, water usage and cylinder life. 2. Modulating output between 20% and 100% of rated capacity. 3. Microprocessor controlled fill valve and drain valve allowing automatic water management. 4. Internal drain water tempering to ensure maximum 140° F [60° C] drain water. 5. Integral fill cup with minimum 1 -inch [25 mm] air gap to prevent back siphoning. 6. Full cylinder indication and pre -notification of automatic shutdown at end of cylinder life. 7. Automatic pulse feature to clean any obstruction from the drain solenoid valve when needed. 8. Automatic off-season shut -down [after 3 days of "no call'] will completely drain the cylinders] and automatically restart on call for humidity. Adjustable on/off and time sequence. Provides extended cylinder life, while ensuring stagnant water does not remain in the system. 9. Accepts a signal from BMS system using Modbus protocols or modulating humidistat. 10. Single or dual channel signal acceptance, demand or transducer. 11. Plumbing door interlock safety switch to allow power interruption when installing or servicing the humidifier. 12. Total Controller microprocessor with alphanumeric backlit display. E. Controls 1. Microcomputer controls featuring; a, Multi -function, backlight, graphic display with keypad programming and adjustment. b. Real time clock to indicate operating parameters. c. Unit operating status in hours. d. On screen troubleshooting. e. On screen graphic indication of humidity demand trends. f. Ability to have interface to building automation system. g. Status indicating LEDs on front of unit. F. Optional Accessories 1. Header for steam distributor. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 238415-2 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 23 84 15 STEAM HUMIDIFIERS 2. Inlet adapter for steam distributor. 3. Air proving switch. 4. Digital duct stat on/off high limit. 5., 0-1 OV digital duct humidistat. G. Steam Distribution - Nortec Short Absorption Manifold complete with: 1. Steam dispersion panel consisting of a (one) horizontal stainless steel header supplying steam to a bank of vertical tubes, spaced closely as necessary to meet absorption distance requirements, and to reduce condensation loss. Refer to schedules] for project specifics. 2. Single horizontal stainless steel header to provide steam to vertical distribution tubes and to reduce condensation losses. Dual header systems cretaing unneccesary heat loss, or systems needing to be installed on a partition or requiring blank off plates are not acceptable. 3. Headers shall be welded stainless steel construction. a. Header design is primarily round tube to minimize pressure drop. Square headers are not acceptable (Full size SAM -e only). b. Slim rectangular profile header design to minimize pressure drop. (Mini SAM -e only). c. Steam inlet and condensate return located on same side of header to allow single point entry and floor mounting. Condensate return shall be located at lowest point of header. 4. Vertical stainless steel distribution tube to promote condensation evacuation. Horizontal distributor tubes are not accepted. 5. Tubes shall be primarily stainless steel construction. a. Distribution tubes shall include provisions for a top bracket. Factory supplied top bracket shall be provided to ensure adequate support of tubes in duct. b. Stainless steel nozzle inserts ensure condensate free steam is discharged from the center of the distribution tubes. Tubes without nozzle inserts are not acceptable. c. Stainless steel nozzles shall be made from similar material as the tubes to ensure similar expansion and contraction coefficients. Tubes with nozzles made from dissimilar metals or polymers are not acceptable. d. Stainless steel nozzle inserts shall have metered orifices, sized to provide even distribution of the discharged steam, spaced for optimum steam absorption. 6. Steam Inlet 7. Steam inlet configuration selection based on atmospheric steam applications. Refer to schedule[s] for project specifics. a. Atmospheric steam, inlet is determined by the selected humidifier. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 END OF SECTION 238415-3 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 23 84 15 STEAM HUMIDIFIERS SECTION 26 05 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 26 Sections, in addition to Division 01 - General Requirements. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all materials and labor in conformance with the following codes and standards: 1. City of Oak Brook - Code of Ordinances. 2. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code 2008 Edition as adopted and Amended by the City of Oak Brook, IL. 3. IBC International Building Code, 2009 Edition, with local amendments. 4. IECC International Energy Conservation Code, 2009 Edition with local amendments. 5. International Fire Code, First Edition, 2009, with local amendments. 6. ADA -AG - American with Disabilities Act - Accessibility Guidelines. 7. Illinois Accessibility Code, 1997 Edition (Illinois Administrative Code, Title 71, Chapter I, Subchapter b, Part 400). 8. Underwriter's Laboratory. 9. Install electrical Work in accordance with. the NECA Standard of Installation. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store and protect all materials as specified under the provisions of Division 01 and as specified herein. B. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. C. Ship products to the job site in their original packaging. Receive and store products in a suitable manner to prevent damage or deterioration. Keep equipment upright at all times. D. Investigate the spaces through which equipment must pass to reach its final destination. Coordinate with the manufacturer to arrange delivery at the proper stage of construction and to provide shipping splits where necessary. 1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Install work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. Drawings have omitted certain branch circuitry in areas for ease of reading. All branch circuitry is to be provided by Contractor. B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 260500-1 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 26 05 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS conditions, including changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before proceeding as specified under modification procedures 1.06 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. Procedures for modification of Work are specified under the provisions of Division 01 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide Work as required for a complete and operational electrical installation. B. All products shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with industry standards. Standards, organizations, and their abbreviations as used hereafter, include the following: 1. American National Standards Institute, Inc (ANSI). 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). C. Install all Work in accordance with the NECA Standard of Installation. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all requested items in Division 26,27 & 28 Sections under provisions of Section 01 6000. 1.09 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions will be considered only as allowed within the provisions of Division O1. 1.10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Cooperate and assist in the preparation of project record documents under the provisions of Division 01, 1.11 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A. Construct Work in sequence with all other trades and Owner's schedule as specified under the provisions of Division 01. B. Prepare Work as specified under the provisions of Division 01. C. Provide cleaning as specified under provisions of Division 01. 1.12 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION A. Proper project management and coordination is critical for a successful project. Manage and coordinate the Work with all other trades in accordance with Division 01 requirements. Reliance on the Drawings and Specifications only for exact project requirements is insufficient for proper coordination. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not used. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 260500-2 SECTION 26 05 00 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 260500-3 SECTION 26 05 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 26 05 01 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical demolition. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional requirements for alterations work. 1.03 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Electrical demolition: Remove all electrical devices as shown on drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual sections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. B. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. . C. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and are intended to identify the limits of the construction site. Remove all electrical systems in their entirety in proper sequence with the Work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings to be removed. B. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. C. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make connections. Notify Owner, Architect/Engineer and local fire service at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. 3.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. B. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. C. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible 26 05 01 - 1 SECTION 26 05 01 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION Copyright© 2014 by KLLIBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 26 05 01 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical demolition. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional requirements for alterations work. 1.03 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Electrical demolition: Remove all electrical devices as shown on drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. . Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual sections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. B. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. C. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and are intended to identify the limits of the construction site. Remove all electrical systems in their entirety in proper sequence with the `Mork. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings to be removed. B. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. C. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make connections. Notify Owner, Architect/Engineer and local fire service at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. 3.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. B. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. C. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible PROJECT NO, 12-172-743 26 05 01 - 1 SECTION 26 05 01 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. D. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. E. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. F. Relocate existing fire alarm devices affected by wall, ceiling and floor demolition. G. Properly dispose of all ballast to approved ballast recycler. Do not land fill ballasts. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 END OF SECTION 260501 -2 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 26 05 01 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION SECTION 26 05 19 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Single conductor building wire. B. Metal -clad cable. C. Wiring connectors. D. Electrical tape. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for grounding conductors and grounding connectors. B. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2001 (Reapproved 2007). B. ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin -Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes; 2010. C. ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (Reapproved 2009). D. ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low -Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure -Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape; 2010. E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. F. NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2009 (ANSI/NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658). G. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009. H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. I. UL 44 - Thermoset -Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 83 - Thermoplastic -Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 26 05 19 - 1 SECTION 26 05 19 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved K. UL 486A-4868 - Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L. UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. M. UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. N. UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. O. UL 1569 - Metal -Clad Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions, 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conductors and cables, including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings, listings, and available sizes, configurations, and stranding. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed circuiting arrangements. Record actual routing. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitabe for purpose specified as shown. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated, permitted, or required. C. Nonmetallic -sheathed cable is not permitted. 2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com. B. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com. C. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com, D. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.03 ALL CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2605 19-2 SECTION 26 05 19 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved the purpose indicated. C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system. D. Comply with NEMA WC 70. E. Thermoplastic -Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83. F. Thermoset -Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44. G. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 26 05 26. H. Conductor Material: 1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper. 2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B787M unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33. Minimum Conductor Size: 1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG. a. Exceptions: 1) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop. J. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. K. Conductor Color Coding: 1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project. 2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation. a. Conductors size 4 AWG and larger may have black insulation color coded using vinyl color coding electrical tape. 3. Color Code: a. 20BY/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. 4) Neutral/Grounded: White. b. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green. c. Travelers for 3 -Way and 4 -Way Switching: Purple. d. For modifications or additions to existing wiring systems, comply with existing color code when existing code complies with NFPA 70 and is approved by the authority having jurisdiction. e. For control circuits, comply with manufacturer's recommended color code. 2.04 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE A. Manufacturers: 26 05 19-3 3 SECTION 26 05 19 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved Copper Building Wire: a. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com. b. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com. c. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com, d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. C. Conductor Stranding: 1. Feeders and Branch Circuits: a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid. b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded. 2. Control Circuits: Stranded, D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V. E. Insulation: 1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN, except as indicated below. a. Size 4 AWG and Larger: Type XHHW-2. b. Exterior Locations: Type XHHW-2. 2.05 METAL -CLAD CABLE A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems Inc: www.afcweb.com. 2. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com. 3. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1569, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used. C. Conductor Stranding: 1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid. 2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded. D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V. E. Insulation: Type THHN/THWN. F. Provide dedicated neutral conductor for each phase conductor where indicated or required, G. Grounding: Full-size integral equipment grounding conductor. 1. Provide additional isolated/insulated grounding conductor where indicated or required. H. Armor: Steel, interlocked tape. I. Provide PVC jacket applied over cable armor where indicated or required for environment of installed location. 2.06 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A -486B or UL PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2605 19-4 SECTION 26 05 19 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved - 486C as applicable. B. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: Comply with Section 26 05 26. C. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps: 1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist -on insulated spring connectors. 2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG.and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors. a. Provide rubber under wrap with insulated plastic tape over wrap. D. Wiring Connectors for Terminations: 1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminations designed for terminal lugs. 2. Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with mechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified. 3. Where over -sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not less than required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device. 4. Provide motor pigtail connectors for connecting motor leads in order to facilitate disconnection. 5. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors where connectors are required. 6. Stranded Conductors Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Use crimped terminals for connections to terminal screws. 7. Conductors for Control Circuits: Use crimped terminals for all connections. E. Twist -on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standard applications and 302 degrees F for high temperature applications; pre -filled with sealant and listed as complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations. F. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set -screw type. 1. Manufacturers: a, Burndy: www.burndy.com. b. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, G. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration. 1. Manufacturers: a. Burndy: www.burndy.com. b. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. H. Crimped Terminals: Nylon -insulated, with insulation grip and terminal configuration suitable for connection to be made. 1. Manufacturers: a. Burndy: www.burndy.com. b. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. 26 05 19 - 5 SECTION 26 05 19 PROJECT NO. 12.172-743 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.07 WIRING ACCESSORIES A. Electrical Tape: 1. Manufacturers: a. 3M: www.3m.com. b. Plymouth Rubber Europa: www.plymouthrubber.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; conformable for application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F. 3. Moisture Sealing Electrical Tape: Insulating mastic compound laminated to flexible, all-weather vinyl backing; minimum thickness of 90 mil. B. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed and suitable for use at the installation temperature. 1. Manufacturers: a. 3M: www.3m.com. b. American Polywater Corporation: www.polywater.com. c. Ideal Industries, Inc: www.ideaIindustries.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. C. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70. D. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Circuiting Requirements: 1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic. 2. When circuit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required. 3. Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location shown. 4. Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA 70. B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2605 19-6 SECTION 26 05 19 CopyrightO 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE C. Install conductors and cable in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. D. Install metal -clad cable (Type MC) in accordance with NECA 120. E. Installation in Raceway: 1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other contaminants. 2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time. 3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure. 4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended by the manufacturer. F. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems. 1. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conductors and cables to lay on ceiling tiles. G. Terminate cables using suitable fittings. 1. Metal -Clad Cable (Type MC): a. Use listed fittings. b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or insulation. Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor. H. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment enclosures. I. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors. 1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters. 2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. 3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. 4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces. 5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturers recommended torque settings. 6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies. J. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors. K. Tape uninsulated conductors and connecors with electrical tape to 150% of insulation rating of conductor. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2605 19-7 SECTION 26 05 19 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved L. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full amopcity of conductors without preceptible temperature rise. M. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape, N. Field -Applied Color Coding: Where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used in lieu of integrally colored insulation as permitted in Part 2 under "Color Coding", apply half overlapping turns of tape at each. termination and at each location conductors are accessible. O. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00. P. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 40 00. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4. C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation resistance test is required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional is not required. D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 END OF SECTION 260519-B Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 26 05 19 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grounding and bonding components. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 19 - Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Additional requirements for conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor color coding. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. B. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures. B. Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS A. Existing Work: Where existing grounding and bonding system components are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only where they are free from corrosion, integrity and continuity are verified, and where acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. B. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors, connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete grounding and bonding system. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 26 05 26 - 1 SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved D. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. E. Bonding and Equipment Grounding: 1. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor. 2. Unless otherwise indicated; connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. 3. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment ground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground bus. 2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS A. General Requirements: 1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated. 2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable. B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in addition to requirements of Section 26 05 19: 1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated. 2.03 MANUFACTURERS A. Cooper Power Systems: www.cooperpower.com. B. FramatomeConnectors International: www.fciconnect.com. C. Lightning Master Corporation: www.fighfningmaster.com. 2.04 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES A. Mechanical Connectors: Bronze. B. Exothermic Connections: C. Wire: Stranded copper. D. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been completed. B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install grounding and bonding system components in a neat and workmanlike manner PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 260526-2 SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved in accordance with NECA 1. C. Provide bonding to meet requirements described in Quality Assurance. Provide separate, insulated conductor within each Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or D. Equipment Grounding Conductor: feeder and branch circuit raceway bushing. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide field inspection in accordance with Section 01 40 00. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS except Section 4. C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.13. END OF SECTION PROJECT N0.12-172-743 2605 26-3 SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Support and attachment components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and other electrical work. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 34 - Conduit: Additional support and attachment requirements for conduits. B. Section 26 05 37 - Boxes: Additional support and attachment requirements for boxes. C. Section 26 51 10 - Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements for interior luminaires. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM Al23/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2009. B. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. C. ASTM 8633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel; 2007, D. MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; Metal Framing Manufacturers Association; 2004. E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G. UL 5B - Strut -Type Channel Raceways and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment and components to be installed. 2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials required for installation. 3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces at the installed locations. and 4. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 260529-1 SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section O1 30 00 -'Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for metal channel (strut) framing systems, non -penetrating rooftop supports, and post -installed concrete and masonry anchors. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 70. B. Comply with applicable building code. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. General Requirements: 1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work. 2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated, where applicable. 3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be supported. Include consideration for vibration, equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable. a. Consider the weight of wire in conduit when selecting products. 4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. 5. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment where installed. a. Zinc -Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633. b. Galvanized Steel: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM Al 23/A123M or ASTM Al 53/A153M. B. Conduit and Cable.Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be supported. 1. Conduit Straps: One -hole or two -hole type; steel or malleable iron. 2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated. C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported. D. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc -plated steel unless otherwise indicated. 1. Minimum Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required: a. Equipment Supports: 1/2 inch diameter. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 260529-2 SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved b. Single Conduit up to 1 inch (27mm) trade size: 1/4 inch diameter. c. Single Conduit larger than 1 inch (27mm) trade size: 3/8 inch diameter, d. Outlet Boxes: 1/4 inch diameter. e. Luminaires: 1/4 inch diameter. E. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and fastener types indicated for the specified applications. 2. Concrete: Use expansion anchors. 3. Solid or Grout -Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors or screw anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts. 5. Plaster and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts.. 6. Steel: Use beam clamps. 7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 8. Wood: Use wood screws. 2.02 CONDUIT HANGERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Minerrallac Electric Company. 2. Substitutions: Or Approved Equal. B. Description: 1. Standard conduit hanger, zinc -plated steel with bolts. 2. Threaded rod and hardware: Plated finish, size and length as required for loading and conditions. 2.03 BEAM CLAMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Appleton. 2. Midwest. 3. Paco. B. Description: Malleable beam clamp, zinc plated steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install support and attachment components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. PROJECT N0.12-172-743 260529-3 SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid. E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from roof deck. , F. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural Engineer. G. Equipment Support and Attachment: 1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to support equipment as required. 2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface -mounted on hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out. 3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface -mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface. H. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. I. Remove temporary supports. J. Do not use power -actuated anchors. K. Do not drill or cut structural members. L. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. M. Install surface -mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. N. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch off wall. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects. C. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion. D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 260529-4 SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 34 CONDUIT PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC). B. Flexible metal conduit (FMC). C. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC). D. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT). E. Conduit fittings. F. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 05 37 - Boxes. D. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2005. B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT); 2005. C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. D. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. E. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/NEMA FB 1). F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. H. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit -Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 360 Liquid -Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2605 34-1 SECTION 26 05 34 CONDUIT Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved K. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing -Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop. 2. Coordinate the arrangement.of conduits with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. 3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and equipment installed under other sections or by others. 4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preserve the integrity of the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty. 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is complete between outlet, junction and splicing points. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate proposed arragement of all conduits exposed in rooms. 2. Include proposed locations of roof penetrations and proposed methods for sealing. 3. Careful lay -out procedures are necessary to provide an acceptable aesthetic appearance and to avoid crossing of conduits. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicated for the specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the most restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. C. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT). D. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 260534-2 SECTION 26 05 34 CONDUIT Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved - E. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing (EMT). F. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. 1. Locations subject to physical damage include, but are not limited to: a. Where exposed below 8 feet, except within electrical and communication rooms or closets. G. Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit. 1. Maximum Length: 6 feet. H. Connections to Vibrating Equipment: 1. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit. 2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 3. Maximum Length: 6 feet unless otherwise indicated. 4. Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to: a. Motors. 2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Existing Work: Where existing conduits are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only where they comply with specified requirements, are free from corrosion, and integrity is verified by pulling a mandrel through them. B. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system. C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated. D. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 1. Branch Circuits: 1/2 inch (16 mm) trade size. 2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size. 3. Control Circuits: 1/2 inch (16 mm) trade size. 4. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 3/8 inch (12 mm) trade size. E. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. 2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com. 2. Republic Conduit: WWW.republic-conduit.com. 3. Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatland.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: 260534-3 SECTION 26 05 34 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743CONDUIT Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2. Non -Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 4. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted. 2.04 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com. 2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com. 3. International Metal Hose: www.metaIhose.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 5148. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 2.05 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com. 2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com. 3. International Metal Hose: www.metaIhose.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 360. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindusfrial.com. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 260534-4 SECTION 26 05 34 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved CONDUIT 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 2.06 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com. 2. Republic Conduit: www,republic-conduit.com. 3. Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatiand.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 4. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) or set -screw type. a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion -resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the conduit to be installed. B. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound -force. C. Sealing Compound for Sealing Fittings: Listed for use with the particular fittings to be installed. D. Modular Seals for Conduit Penetrations: Rated for minimum of 40 psig; Suitable for the conduits to be installed. E. Description: UL65-1A"Type EB and A PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit." 1. Conduit: Schedule 40. Suitable for exposure to sunlight, direct burial and concrete encasement. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings. B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 260534-5 SECTION 26 05 34 CONDUIT Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved D. Verify that mechanical work which is likely to injure conductors has been completed. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101. D. Conduit Routing: 1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic. 2. When conduit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required. 3. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed. 4. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access. 5. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends between pull points. 6. Arrange conduit to provide no more than 150 feet between pull points. 7. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible. 8. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at sealing fittings where moisture may collect. 9. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other systems. 10. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces. This includes, but is not limited to: a. Heaters. b. Hot water piping. c. Flues. 11. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack. E. Conduit Support: 1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. 3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles. 4. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod. 5, Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits. Connections and Terminations: 1. Use approved zinc -rich paint or conduit joint compound on field -cut threads of galvanized steel conduits prior to making connections. 2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads. 3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another. 4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2605 34-6 SECTION 26 05 34 CONDUIT Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved of liquid into connectors. 5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations. 6. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect conductors. 7. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical continuity. 8. Use suitable caps to protect installed raceway against entrance of dirt and moisture. G. Penetrations: 1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer. 2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required. 4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground. 5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to prevent entry of moisture and gases. 6. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of membrane. 7. Make penetrations for roof -mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty. Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealing with submittals. 8. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00. H. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection. 2. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost. I. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessible point near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces. 2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces. J. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 26 05 34 -7 SECTION 26 05 34 CONDUIT CopyrightO 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion. C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and,foreign matter. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation of conductors. B. Horizontal runs of cabling, conduit or any such electrical items are NOT to be placed within the cross section of the slabs/decks. All such items are to be installed below the slab/deck with industry standard, engineer approved systems and adhere to the details on the structural engineering detail sheets. The contractor during his bid shall assume that he needs to provide and engineer all supplemental framing elements to span to the structural elements thereby by-passing the slabs/decks where required. All such systems are subject to the review of the engineer of record. Do not hang directly from roof decks unless engineer of record approves. C. Do not cut through masonry bond beams or any other structural element when installing openings for all conduits or other work. Coordinate with the structural drawings and mason contractor for all bond beam and structural element locations. Contractor cutting through or otherwise damaging these elements will be responsible for all associated engineering fees and subsequent retrofit reinforcing deemed necessary to reinstate the continuity and integrity of the damaged elements. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 260534-8 SECTION 26 05 34 CONDUIT Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 26 05 37 BOXES PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used as junction and pull boxes. B. Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 05 34 - Conduit: 1. Conduit bodies and other fittings. 2. Additional requirements for locating boxes to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points. D. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. E. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: 1. Wall plates. 2. Floor box service fittings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. C. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/NEMA FB 1). D. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet -Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008 (Revised 2010) (ANSI/NEMA OS 1). E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non -Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 26 05 37 - 1 SECTION 26 05 37 BOXES CopyrightO 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved H. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 508A - Industrial Control Panels; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70. 2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 3. Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors, clamps, support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70. 4. Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of connected conduits, calculated according to NFPA 70. 5. Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 6. Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity. 7. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush -mounted boxes where indicated. 8. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0l 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for cabinets and enclosures. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations for outlet and device boxes, pull boxes, cabinets and enclosures, floor boxes, and underground handhole enclosures. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Install at locations required for box to serve intended purpose. Include in base bid, installation within 10 feet of location shown. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2605 37-2 SECTION 26 05 37 BOXES Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BOXES A, General Requirements: 1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. 2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed. 3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated. 4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. 5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate. B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and Pull Boxes: 1. Use sheet -steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required. 2. Use cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof Basketed covers. 3. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where required. 4. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction. 5. Sheet -Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A. 6. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A; furnish with threaded hubs. 7. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single -piece construction. Do not use field -connected gangable boxes. 8. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 27 26. 9. Manufacturers: a. -Cooper Crouse -Hinds, a division of Cooper Industries: www, cooperi nd ustries. com. b. Hubbell Incorporated; Bell Products: www.hubbell-bell.com. c. Hubbell Incorporated; RACO Products: www.hubbelf-raco.com. d. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. f. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches: 1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL 508A. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 260537-3 SECTION 26 05 37 BOXES Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1, painted steel. b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R, painted steel. 3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches: a. Provide screw -cover or hinged -cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated. 4. Manufacturers: a. Cooper B -Line, a division of. Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com. b. Hoffman, a brand of Pentair Technical Products: www.hoffmcinonline.com. c. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiegmann Products: www.hubbell-wiegmann.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements areas shown on drawings. B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where applicable, NECA 130. C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. D. Flush -mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface -mounted. E. Unless otherwise indicated, boxes may be surface -mounted where exposed conduits are indicated or permitted. F. Box Locations: Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels in accordance with Section 08 31 00 as required where approved by the Architect. Unless dimensioned, box locations indicated are approximate. a. Obtain verification from Architect/Engineer for locations of outlets throughout prior to rough -in. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others. Locate junction and pull boxes as indicated, as required to facilitate installation of conductors, and to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points in accordance with Section 26 05 34. G. Box Supports: 1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in accordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 260537-4 SECTION 26 05 37 BOXES Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling grid or ceiling support system. 4. Equipment Support Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include 2 inch male fixture studs where required. H. Install boxes plumb and level. I. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity. J. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00. K. Close unused box openings. L. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment installed or designated for future use. M. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26. N. Thermal and Moisture Protection: Provide thermal and moisture protection made by Work under this Contract of all exterior wall, floor and roof penetrations in accordance with Division 7 requirements. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until ready for installation of conductors. END OF SECTION 26 05 37 - 5 SECTION 26 05 37 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 BOXES Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical identification requirements. B. Identification nameplates and labels. C. Wire and cable markers. D. Voltage markers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09.90 00 - Painting and Coating. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1'.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identified prior to fabrication of identification products. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not conceal items to be identified, in locations such as above suspended ceilings, until identification products have been installed. 2. Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and painting are complete. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwiters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose specified on drawings. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. - Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Identification for Equipment: PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 26 05 53 - 1 SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components. a. Switchboards: 1) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 2) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device. Identify spares and spaces. b. Enclosed switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers: 1) Identify load(s) served. Include location. B. Identification for Conductors and Cables: 1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 05 19. 2. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder or branch -circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system. 3. Use wire and cable markers to identify circuit number or other designation indicated for power, control, and instrumentation conductors and cables at the following locations: a. At each source and load connection. b. Within boxes when more than one circuit is present. c. Within equipment enclosures when conductors and cables enter or leave the enclosure. C. Identification for Raceways: 1. Furnish markers for each conduit longer than 6 feet. 2. Use voltage markers or color -coded bands to identify systems other than normal power system for accessible conduits at maximum intervals of 20 feet. a. Color -Coded Bands: Use field -painting or vinyl color coding electrical tape to mark bands 3 inches wide. 1) Color Code: (a) 208 Volt system: Black. (b) Fire Alarm System: Red. 2) Field -Painting: Comply with Section 09 90 00. 3) Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Comply with Section 26 05 19. 3. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present for wireways at maximum intervals of 20 feet. D. Identification for Boxes: 1. Use voltage markers or color coded boxes to identify systems other than normal power system. a. Color -Coded Boxes: Field -painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00 per the some color code used for raceways. 2.02 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Identification Nameplates: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 260553.2 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS b. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. c. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2. Materials: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates. b. Outdoor Locations: Use plastic nameplates suitable for exterior use. 3. Plastic Nameplates: Two -layer or three -layer laminated acrylic or electrically non-conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engraved text. 4. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to inch high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes. B. Identification Labels: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brady Corporation: www.brodyid.com. b. Brother International Corporation: www. brother- usa.corn. c. Panduit Corp: www.panduit.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant. 3. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine -printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless otherwise indicated. C. Format for Equipment Identification: 1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches. 2. Legend: a. Equipment designation or other approved description. 3. Minimum Text Height: a. Equipment Designation: 1/4 inch. b. Individual Loads: 1/8 inch. 4. Color: a. Normal Power System: White text on black background. 2.03 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation: www.bradyid.com. 2. HellermannTyton: www.hellermanntyton.com. 3. Panduit Corp: www.panduit.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified. C. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable ties. D. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated. E. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine -printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise indicated. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 26 05 53 -3 SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved F. Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch. G. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated. 2.04 VOLTAGE MARKERS A. Markers for Conduits: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl, self-adhesive vinyl cloth, or vinyl snap -around type markers. B. Markers for Boxes and Equipment Enclosures: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl or self-adhesive vinyl cloth type markers. C. Minimum Size: 1. Markers for Conduits: As recommended by manufacturer for conduit size to be identified. 2. Markers for Pull Boxes: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches. 3. Markers for Junction Boxes: 1/2 by 2 1/4 inches. D. Legend: 1. Markers for Voltage Identification: Highest voltage present. 2. Markers for System Identification: E. Color: Black text on orange background unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows: 1. Surface -Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front. 2. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform. 3. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device. 4. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access. 5. Conduits: Legible from the floor. 6. Boxes: Outside face of cover. 7. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access. C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified. D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing, or epoxy cement. E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or wrinkles and edges properly sealed. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 26 05 53.4 SECTION 26 05 53 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS B. Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other signs of improper adhesion. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2605 53-5 SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS CopyrightO 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 26 06 20.26 WIRING CONNECTIONS 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Electrical connections to equipment specified under other sections and not an integral part of the electrical distribution system. B. Related Sections: Provide electrical connection and conduit rough -in to equipment specified under all related sections and on Drawings. Refer specifally, but not limited to, these sections further information 1. Section 23 74 13 - Packaged Outdoor Central -Station Air -Handing Units. 2. Section 23 84 15 - Steam Humidifiers (Alternate # 1). C. Electrical Connections to Owner Furnished Equipment: 1. Provide electrical connections and conduit rough -in to Owner's equipment as specified under the provisions of Division 01 2. Provide final connection to modular furniture and laboratory casework. Install furniture receptacles and data wiring in base of furniture. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NEMA WD 1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices. B. NEMA WD 6 -Wiring Device Configurations. C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.03 COORDINATION A. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer's instructions for all equipment furnished under other sections. Do not rely solely on the plans and spcifications for execution of this Work. B. Determine connection locations and requirements. Include necessary field evaluation time to inspect connection requirements of all equipment. C. Sequence rough -in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation schedule for equipment. D. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up schedule for equipment. E. Coordinate with all other trades to determine exact rough -in requirements for each equipment or device. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CORDS AND CAPS A. See section 26 05 19. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 26 06 20.26 - 1 SECTION 26 06 20.26 WIRING CONNECTIONS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. 3.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. C. Make wiring connections using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered in heat producing equipment. D. Provide receptacle outlet where connection with attachment plug is indicated. Provide cord and cap where field -supplied attachment plug is necessary. E. Provide suitable strain -relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. F. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices for all equipment. G. Modify equipment control wiring with terminal block jumpers as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. H. Provide interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. I. Cooperate and assist Owner and other trades in the start-up of all equipment as specified under the provision of Division 01. 3.03 ELECTRICAL CONDUIT ROUGH -IN A. Obtain manufacturer's installation instructions and rough -in electrical conduit system as detailed in manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Extend conduit to accessible ceiling locations where complete conduit system is not required. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 26 06 20.26 - 2 SECTION 26 06 20.26 WIRING CONNECTIONS Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 26 24 13 SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Enclosed Switches. 2. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards. 3. Distribution Panelboards. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Under Provisions of Division 01 - Submittals: 1. Product Data: Provide data on enclosed switches and circuit breakers and panelboard circuit breakers. 2. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: a. Panelboard: Submit NEMA PB 2.1. B. Submit Under Provisions of Section 01780 - Contract Closeout: 1. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: a. Panelboard: Submit NEMA PB 2.1. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NECA'(National Electrical Contractors Association) "Standard of Installation." B. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. C. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. D. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ENCLOSED SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D. 2. General Electric. 3. Siemens. 4. Substitutions: Or Approved Equal. B. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEW KS 1, Type HS or GS, horsepower rated, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in the OFF position. C. Enclosures: 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R. 2.02 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PAN ELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2624 13 -1 SECTION 26 24 13 SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 1. Square D or Gus Berthold - Match existing. B. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; lighting and appliance circuit breaker type panelboard: 1. Breakers: As scheduled on Drawings and specified hereafter. a. Lighting: SWD and HID. b. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning: HACR rated. 2.03 DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Gus Berthold. 2. Substitutions: None - Match existing manufacturer type. B. Breakers: Provide fixed thermal magnetic trip molded case breakers branch devices as indicated on Drawings and scheduled at the end Section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide typed or neatly handwritten circuit directory for each branch circuit ponelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting modifications. C. Provide engraved plastic nameplates. 3.02 CLEANING A. Clean equipment finishes to remove paint and concrete splatters. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 END OF SECTION 2624 13 -2 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 26 24 13 SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall switches. B. Wall dimmers. C. Receptacles. D. Wall plates. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 37 - Boxes. B. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. C. Section 26 06 20.26 - Wiring Connections: Cords and plugs for equipment. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FS W -C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; Federal Specification; Revision G, 2001. B. FS W -S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush -mounted (General Specification); Federal Specification; Revision F, 1999. C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. D. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. E. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1999 (R 2005). F. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002 (82008). G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. H. UL 20 - General -Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush -Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K. UL 943 - Ground -Fault Circuit -Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L. UL 1472 - Solid -State Dimming Controls; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 26 27 26 - 1 SECTION 26 27 26 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 WIRING DEVICES Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of actual equipment to be installed. 2. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block, to provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices. 3. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Wall Dimmers: Include information on operation and setting of presets. 2. GFI Receptacles: Include information on status indicators and testing procedures and intervals. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of wiring devices. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com. B. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com. C. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com. D. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us E. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. F. Source Limitations: Where possible, for each type of wiring device furnish products PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 262726-2 SECTION 26 27 26 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved WIRING DEVICES produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier. 2.02 APPLICATIONS A. Provide wiring devices, suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served. B. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere rating not less than that of the branch circuit. C. Provide weather resistant GFI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for all receptacles installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations. 2.03 ALL WIRING DEVICES A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Finishes: 1. All Wiring Devices: Ivory with ivory aluminum wall plate unless otherwise indicated. 2. Wiring Devices Installed in Finished Spaces: Ivory with ivory aluminum wall plate unless otherwise indicated. 3. Wiring Devices Installed in Unfinished Spaces: Gray with galvanized steel wall plate unless otherwise indicated. 4. Wiring Devices Installed in Wet or Damp Locations: Ivory with specified weatherproof cover unless otherwise indicated. 2.04 WALL SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com. 2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com. 3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. All Wall Switches: AC only, quiet operating, general -use snap switches with silver alloy contacts, complying .with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS W -S-896; types as indicated on the drawings. 1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. C. Standard Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings. 2.05 WALL DIMMERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com. 2. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; Maestro Series: www.lutron.com. 3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. All Wall Dimmers: Solid-state with continuous full -range even control following square law dimming curve, integral radio frequency interference filtering, power failure preset PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 262726-3 SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved memory, air gap switch accessible without removing wall plate, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 1472; types and ratings suitable for load controlled as indicated on the drawings. C. Control: Slide control type with separate on/off switch. D. Power Rating, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required to Control the Load Indicated on the Drawings: E. Provide locator light, illuminated with load off. F. Provide accessory wall switches to match dimmer appearance when installed adjacent to each other. 2.06 RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com. 2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com. 3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; Designer Style: www.lutron.com. 4. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. All Receptacles: Self -grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W -C-596; types as indicated on the drawings. 1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. 2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6. C. Convenience Receptacles: 1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. 2. Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R„ listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. D. GFI Receptacles: 1. All GFI Receptacles: Provide with feed -through protection, light to indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection, and list as complying with UL 943, class A. a. Provide test and reset buttons of same color as device. 2. Standard GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style. 3. Weather Resistant GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations. a. Weatherproof die cast cover. 1) Intermatic Model WP1030MC (Two -Gang). 2) Intermatic Model WP1010MC (One -Gang). PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 26 2726 -4 SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 3) Approved Equal. 2.07 WALL PLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com. 2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com. 3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com. 4. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. All Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D. 1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring devices. 2. Size: Standard. 3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish. 4. Paintable metallic. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. D. Verify that final surface finishes are complefe, including painting. E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. F. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 as required for installation of wiring devices provided under this section. C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals. E. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 262726-5 SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved terminal and tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push -in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw -actuated binding. F. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. G. Unless otherwise indicated, GFI receptacles may be connected to provide feed -through protection to downstream devices. Label such devices to indicate they are protected by upstream GFI protection. H. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place. I. Install wall switches with OFF position down. J. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer. K. Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers. L. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted receptacles with grounding pole on left. M. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement. N. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or designated for future use. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 40 00. B. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects. C. Operate each wall switch and wall dimmer with circuit energized to verify proper operation. D. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity. E. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions. F. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. B. Adjust presets for wall dimmers according to manufacturer's instructions as directed by Architect. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 262726-6 SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 262726-7 SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES Copyright© 2014 by KIUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 26 51 10 LIGHTING PART 1 .GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Luminaires and Lampholders. 2. Lamps. 3. Fluorescent Ballasts. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Under Provisions of Division 01: 1. Shop Drawings: Indicate construction, installation and mounting details for Products. 2. Product Data: Provide product data for each luminaire and lighting unit. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Provide wiring diagrams for dimmable ballasts and dimmable switches. 4. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product. B. Submit Under Provisions of Division 01: 1. Project Record Documents: Accurately record location of each luminaire. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI C78.379 - Electric Lamps - Incandescent and High -Intensity Discharge Reflector Lamps - Classification of Beam Patterns B. ANSI C82.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Division 01. B. Accept products on site. Inspect for damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRES AND LAMPHOLDERS A. Luminaire Schedule: Product requirements for each luminaire and lampholder are specified in luminaire schedule shown on Drawing E610. 2.02 LAMPS A. Fluorescent Lamp Manufacturers: 1. Sylvania. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2651 10 - 1 SECTION 26 51 10 LIGHTING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved 2. Philips. 3. General Electric. B. Description: 1. Fluorescent Lamps: Type as scheduled, color 4100K. 2. Reflector Lamp Beam Patterns: Conform to ANSI C78.379. 2.03 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Advance. 2. Universal. 3. Jefferson. 4. Motorola. 5. Magnetek. B. Description: Provide fluorescent ballast suitable for use under installation conditions listed for each luminaire and lampholder. 1. Voltage: As scheduled. 2. Type: UL listed Class P, ANSI C82.1, discrete component programmed rapid start, electronic ballast in compliance with the National Energy Conservation Amendments of 1988 to Energy Policy and Conservation Act of 1987. a. Minimum starting temperature: 50 degrees F. b. Percent total harmonic distortion (ANSI): Less than 10 percent. c. Sound Rating: A 3. Source Quality Control: Certify ballast design and construction by Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc. 4. T8 lamps: CBM certified with average input wattage of 49 watts as tested per ANSI C82.2. 5. Source Quality Control: Certify ballast design and construction by Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A.. Examine substrate and supporting grids for luminaires. B. Examine each fixture to determine suitability for lamps specified. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install luminaires and accessories in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B.. Install lamps in'each luminaires. C. Bond luminaires, metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. D. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. E. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. F. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. G. Install clips to secure recessed grid -supported luminaires in place. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 265110-2 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 26 51 10 LIGHTING H. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. I. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for improper connections and operation. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Align luminaires and clean lenses and diffusers at completion of work. B. Aim adjustable luminaires and lampholders as indicated or as directed. C. Aim emergency lighting units to meet approval of authority having jurisdiction. D. Clean paint splatters, dirt and debris from installed luminaires. E. Relamp luminaires which have failed lamps at completion of work. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2651 10-3 SECTION 26 51 10 LIGHTING Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire alarm system design and installation, including all components, wiring, and conduit. B. Replacement and removal of existing fire alarm system components, wiring, and conduit indicated. C. Maintenance of fire alarm system under contract for specified warranty period. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Smoke dampers monitored and controlled by fire alarm system. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Provide all materials and labor in conformance with the following codes and standards: 1. City of Oak Brook - Code of Ordinances. 2. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code 2008 Edition as adopted and Amended by the City of Oak Brook, IL. 3. IBC International Building Code, 2009 Edition, with local amendments. 4. IECC International Energy Conservation Code, 2009 Edition with local amendments. 5. International Fire Code, First Edition, 2009, with local amendments. b. ADA -AG - American with Disabilities Act - Accessibility Guidelines. 7. Illinois Accessibility Code, 1997 Edition (Illinois Administrative Code, Title 71, Chapter I, Subchapter b, Part 400). 8. Underwriters Laboratory. 9. Install electrical Work in accordance with the NECA Standard of Installation. B. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Evidence of designer qualifications. C. Shop Drawings: Submit all information required for plan review and permitting by authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to floor plans, riser diagrams, and description of operation: 1. Shop drawing submitted to Architect/Engineer shall be approved and signed by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Submit point-to-point and single line wiring diagrams showing the point of connection and terminals used for all field connections. 3. Submit diagrams showing all connections from field devices to control panel. a. Include a detailed description of the control panel as it shall operate for this specific installation. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2831 00- 1 Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 4. Submit field wiring color -coding legend. 5. Submit control panel interior wiring diagram. b. Indicate existing wiring arrangements and locations of devices and wiring routing. 7. Copy (if any) of list of data required by authority having jurisdiction. 8. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out to the extent known at the time. 9. Clear and concise description of operation, with input/output matrix similar to that shown in NFPA 72 Appendix A-7-5-2.2(9), and complete listing of software required. 10. Circuit layouts; number, size, and type of raceways and conductors; conduit fill calculations; spare capacity calculations; notification appliance circuit voltage drop calculations. 11. Manufacturer's detailed data sheet for each component, including wiring diagrams, installation instructions, circuit length limitations, dimensions, ratings, layouts and complete catalog numbers. a. Submit UL listings with cross -listing substantiation for each system component clearly marked. 12. Certification by either the manufacturer of the control unit or by the manufacturer of each other component that the components are compatible with the control unit. 13. Certification by the manufacturer of the control unit that the system design complies with the contract documents. 14. Do not show existing components to be removed. D. Evidence of installer qualifications. E. Inspection and Test Reports: 1. Submit inspection and test plan prior to closeout demonstration. 2. Submit documentation of satisfactory inspections and tests. 3. Submit NFPA 72 "Inspection and Test Form," filled out. Operating and Maintenance Data: See Section 01 78 00 for additional requirements; revise and resubmit until acceptable; have one set available during closeout demonstration: 1. Complete set of specified design documents, as approved by authority having jurisdiction. 2. Additional printed set of project record documents and closeout documents, bounc or filed in same manuals. 3. Contact information for firm that will be providing contract maintenance and trouble call-back service. 4. List of recommended spare parts, tools, and instruments for testing. 5. Replacement parts list with current prices, and source of supply. b. Detailed troubleshooting guide and large scale input/output matrix. 7. Preventive maintenance, inspection, and testing schedule complying with NFPA 72; provide printed copy and computer format acceptable to Owner. 8. Detailed but easy to read explanation of procedures to be taken by non-technical administrative personnel in the event of system trouble, when routine testing is being conducted, for fire drills, and when entering into contracts for remodeling. G. Project Record Documents: See Section 01 78 00 for additional requirements; have. one set available during closeout demonstration: 1. Complete set of floor plans showing actual installed locations of components, PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2831 00-2 SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved conduit, and zones. 2 "As installed" wiring and schematic diagrams, with final terminal identifications. 3. "As programmed" operating sequences, including control events by device, updated input/output chart, and voice messages by event. H. Closeout Documents: 1. Certification by manufacturer that the system has been installed in compliance with his installation requirements, is complete, and is in satisfactory operating condition. 2. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out completely and signed by installer and authorized representative of authority having jurisdiction. 3. Final shop drawings approved and signed by the local authority having jurisdiction. 4. Submit record of 100 percent acceptance test. 5. Submit written statement by installing contractor that the system has been installed and tested in accordance with approved plans, specifications and NFPA requirements. 6. Include actual field conditions including location of end -of -line resistors, cable outing, color coding, terminations, devices and equipment. 7. Include written sequence of operation. 8. Maintenance contract. I. Maintenance Materials, Tools, and Software: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer: Qualified employee of fire alarm control panel manufacturer, Contractor, or installer , with experience designing fire alarm systems in the jurisdictional area of the authorities having jurisdiction. B. Manufacturer: Qualified company specializing in smoke detection and fire alarm systems with five years documented experience. C. Installer: Qualified firm with minimum 5 years documented experience installing fire alarm systems of the specified type and providing contract maintenance service as a regular part of their business. 1. Authorized representative of control unit manufacturer; submit manufacturer's certification that installer is authorized; include name and title of manufacturer's representative making certification. 2. Installer Personnel: At least 2 years of experience installing fire alarm systems. 3. Supervisor: NICET level III or IV (3 or 4) certified fire alarm technician; furnish name and address. D. Maintenance Contractor: Same entity as installer or different entity with specified qualifications. E. Qualified personnel includes those persons that are: 1. Factory trained and certified; OR 2. NICET Level III or IV (3 or 4) Fire Alarm certified; OR 3. International Municipal Signal Association Fire Alarm certified; OR 4. Certified by state (Illinois Department of Professional Regulation); OR 5. Trained, qualified, and employed by an organization listed by a national testing PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2831 00-3 SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved laboratory. F. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct a preconstruction conference as Specified Under the Provisions of Division 01. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide installer's warranty that the installation is free from defects and will remain so for 1 year after date of Substantial Completion. B. Contractor shall, as condition precedent to final payment, execute a written guaranty to the Owner. Materials and equipment furnished by him under this Contract shall remain in satisfactory operating condition for a period of one year from the date of the final acceptance of the Work by the Owner. The guaranty shall also include prompt emergency service. All defects or damages due to faulty materials or workmanship shall be repaired or replaced without delay to the Owner's satisfaction and at the Contractor's expense. 1.07 MAINTENANCE A. Submit Under Provisions of Division 01. B. Include operating instructions, and maintenance and repair procedures. C. Provide a one year full maintenance and inspection service from date of Final Acceptance. Conform to maintenance and inspection service requirements of NFPA 72. D. Provide a one year supervising station monitoring service from date of Final Acceptance. 1.08 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. The existing fire alarm system control panel is a hard wired system. 1. The existing control panel will be modified and expanded to feed new devices as shown on the floor plans. 2. Provide new equipment compatable with existing devices and system at site. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Alarm Control Units -Basis of Design: Fire Lite: MS -44248. B. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.02 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Fire Alarm System: Provide modifications and extensions to the existing automatic fire detection and alarm system: 1. Provide all components necessary, regardless of whether shown in the contract documents or not. 2. Protected Premises: Areas denoted on the drawings. 3. Comply with the following; where requirements conflict, order of precedence of requirements is as listed: a. The Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA). b. The requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction, which is Village of PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2831 00-4 SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved Oak Brook. c. Applicable local codes. d. The contract documents (drawings and specifications). e. NFPA 72; where the word "should" is used consider that provision mandatory; where conflicts between requirements require deviation from NFPA 72, identify deviations clearly on design documents. 4. Existing Control Panel: Make modifications to the existing panel: a. Additional Power Supplies: Adequate to remote detectors. Include battery-operated emergency power supply with capacity for operating system in standby mode for 60 hours followed by alarm mode for 5 minutes. B. Supervising Stations and Fire Department Connections: 1. Existing connections to remain. C. Circuits: 1. All cabling shall be plenum rated. 2.03 EXISTING COMPONENTS A. Existing Fire Alarm System: Remove existing components indicated and incorporate remaining components into new system, under warranty as if they were new; do not take existing portions of system out of service until new portions are fully operational, tested, and connected to existing system. B. Clearly label components that are "Not In Service." C. Remove unused existing components and materials from site and dispose of properly. 2.04 FIRE SAFETY SYSTEMS INTERFACES A. Alarm: Provide alarm initiation in accordance with NFPA 72 for the following: 1. Duct smoke detectors. B. HVAC: 1. Duct Smoke Detectors: Close dampers indicated; shut down air handlers indicated. 2.05 COMPONENTS A. Initiating Devices: 1, Duct Mounted Smoke Detector: Analog photoelectric type, duct sampling tubes extending width of duct, in duct -mounted housing compatible with control panel and air stream velocities. Fan control shall not be hard wired through duct detector. Fan shutdown shall be completed by fan shutdown relay. 2. B. Circuit Conductors: Copper; provide 200 feet extra; color code and label. 2.06 SYSTEM DESIGN A. Wiring: Wiring shall be solid copper and installed in electrical metallic tubing conduit throughout all exposed areas. Flexible metallic conduit may be used for the drops to devices from accessible junction boxes where it must be "fished" inside wall. 1. ,Conductors for low voltage DC initiating circuits shall be solid No. 18 AWG minimum. Conductors for alarm indicating horn/strobe circuits shall be No. 14 PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2831 00-5 SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved AWG minimum. Conductors for 120 V circuit shall be No. 12 AWG minimum, 600 VAC rated. 2. Wire for 120V circuits shall not be in the same conduit as low voltage DC circuits. Identify circuit conductors within each enclosure where a tap, splice or termination is made. 3. Conductor identification shall be by plastic coated self -sticking printed markers or by heat -shrink type sleeves. Attach markers in a manner that will not permit accidental detachment. Identify, control circuit terminations. a. All conductors shall be color coded and 300 volt rated (minimum). b. Conductors used for the same functions shall be distinctively color coded. c. Use two different color codes for each alarm circuit; one for each loop. 4. Conductors shall be plenum rated. B. Splicing for any fire alarm circuits is prohibited except by means of terminal strips of blocks, utilizing screw type terminals located in properly sized junction, pull boxes or within the fire alarm control panel. C. Circuit Connections: Connect all circuit conductors entering or leaving the panel to screw-type terminals with each terminal marked for identification. Locate end -of -line resistors, diodes and relays, if any, in the fire alarm control panel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Field inspect existing fire alarm system installation to determine all required interface components necessary for fire alarm system replacement and relocation. B. Perform repair work on existing system to eliminate trouble conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with applicable codes, NFPA 72, NFPA 70, and the contract documents. B. Conceal all wiring, conduit, boxes, and supports where installed in finished areas. C. Obtain Owner's approval of locations of devices, before installation. D. Install instruction cards and labels. 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR COMPLETION A. Perform field inspection and testing of fire alarm system in accordance with Division 01. B. Notify Owner 7 days prior to beginning completion inspections and tests. C. Notify authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheduling inspections and tests and for observation by their personnel. D. Provide the services of the installers supervisor or person with equivalent qualifications to supervise inspection and testing, correction, and adjustments. E. Prepare for testing by ensuring that all work is complete and correct; perform preliminarytests as required. F. Provide all tools, software, and supplies required to accomplish inspection and testing. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2831 00-6 SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved G. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NFPA 72 and requirements of local authorities; document each inspection and test. 1. Include description of testing and results in test report. 2. Perform 100 percent acceptance test to NFPA 72 standards on system. H. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with contract documents. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Include services of technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections, and system testing. 3.05 CLOSEOUT A. Substantial Completion of the project cannot be achieved until inspection and testing is successful and: 1. Approved operating and maintenance data has been delivered. 2. All aspects of operation have been demonstrated to Owner. 3. Final acceptance of the fire alarm system has been given by authorities having jurisdiction. 3.06 MAINTENANCE A. See Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to maintenance service. B. Provide to Owner, at no extra cost, a written maintenance contract for entire manufacturer's warranty period, to include the work described below. C. Perform routine inspection, testing, and preventive maintenance required by NFPA 72, including: 1. Maintenance of fire safety interface and supervisory devices connected to fire alarm system. 2. Repairs required, unless due to improper use, accidents, or negligence beyond the control of the maintenance contractor. 3. Record keeping required by NFPA 72 and authorities having jurisdiction. D. Provide trouble call-back service upon notification by Owner: 1. Provide on-site response within 2 hours of notification. 2. Include allowance for call-back service during normal working hours at no extra . cost to Owner. 3. Owner will pay for call-back service outside of normal working hours on an hourly basis, based on actual time spent at site and not including travel time; include hourly rate and definition of normal working hours in maintenance contract. E. Provide a complete description of preventive maintenance, systematic examination, adjustment, cleaning, inspection, and testing, with a detailed schedule. F. Maintain a log at each fire alarm control unit, listing the date and time of each inspection and call-back visit, the condition of the system, nature of the trouble, correction performed, and parts replaced. Submit duplicate of each log entry to Owner's representative upon completion of site visit. PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2831 00 -7 SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved G. Comply with Owner's requirements for access to facility and security. END OF SECTION PROJECT NO. 12-172-743 2831 00-8 SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Copyright© 2014 by KLUBER, INC.; All Rights Reserved Section E General Conditions 1. Contractor shall have five (5) years of experience which is comparable in type and scope to this project. 2. All work shall take place between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 3:30 p.m. Monday through Friday unless otherwise approved in writing by the Village. 3. The project will be done on consecutive work days until completed, delays only to inclement weather. 4. Contractor is required to obtain all necessary permits from the Village of Oak Brook, and schedule required inspections through Community Development. 5. The contractor shall supply to the Village, phone numbers where he/she can be reached after normal working hours. 6. The contractor must submit with the bid proposal five (5) references, names and phone numbers of similar projects completed within the last two (2) years. 7. The contractor must submit all manufacturers' literature on all materials that will be used on this project, including M.S.D.S. (Material Safety Data Sheets) prior to any work beginning. 8. A storage location for supplies, ladders and scaffolding shall be mutually agreed upon between the Village and the contractor before any material is stored on site. Deliver material with manufacturers labels intact and legible, store material on raised platforms and cover material with protective covering. 9. Before work is started, deliver to the job site sufficient material to complete the project. 10. If a dumpster is required, the location of the dumpster placement shall be mutually agreed upon between the Village and the contractor. 11.AII ladders and scaffolding shall be maintained during the course of this project and shall be secured at the end of each workday. 12. Provide barricades to ensure that falling debris will not injure anyone, and to prevent public access to the work area at all times. Yellow "CAUTION" tape will be placed below the immediate work areas of laborers and scaffolds to warn the public of men working overhead. 13.At all times the work and storage areas shall be kept in a clean, orderly, and a picked up manner, to prevent debris from blowing. Clean adjoining streets and immediate vicinity at the end of each work day. Sidewalks, windowsills, roofs and other work areas will be broom swept to remove all debris. Daily material and debris not placed into dumpster will be removed from the site. 14. Upon completion of the project the work area shall be cleaned. All debris and remaining material. and supplies shall be removed from the jobsite, including the dumpster within 72 hours of completion. 1 I Section F Statement of Contractor's Qualifications 0 All questions must be answered and the data given must be clear and comprehensive. This statement must be notarized. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached sheets. The Contractor may submit any additional information he or she desires. I 1. Name of Contractor: r Rasst- MECKAM\CPL. CON'C�P�T00.S 1. 2. Permanent main office address: KEN]-, AVE ELK Ge12o�E V L6� IL- 3. When organized: PSG 4. If a corporation, where incorporated: IgBC� 5. How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under your present firm or trade name: 2 g qE AlZS 6. Contracts on hand: (Schedule these, showing amount of each contract and the appropriate anticipated dates of completion) AMP - 6Ao(LCSi MAKE: u NI(a WW2Pftte, )L. 'ff26�LBOtb-N1MRtH QV9 EoMPLV-nom 7. General character of work performed by your company: H1EL-7I\1 a I VL�h1TIL.ATIKCa kIR- cpNDiTl.c>tAItA 8. Have you ever defaulted on a contract: N O 9. List, on an attached sheet, the more important projects recently completed by your company, stating the approximate cost for each, and the month and year completed. Include a contact person and phone # for each. 10. List your major equipment available for this contract: f 11. Experience in work similar in importance to this project: VILLAGE OF- C LCNDRLE 91S-5:PoRZTS H•yl3 12. Background and experience of the principal members of your organization, including the officers. ya goFAZS OF &X ERIENCE A -TqF. ceY�Mvv\erC-tOL(— H ATIWA k AIFCnhnITI0 tN(rl INDc: 13. Credit available: o`��� 000 14. Bank reference: -BAt,K Page 1 I 15. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and furnish any other information that may be required by the Village of Oak Brook: '`l1-� !S 16. The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm, or corporation to furnish any information requested. by the Village of Oak Brook in verification of the recitals comprising this Statement of Contractor's Qualifications. *%A DATED at jLk 6i-- JL , Illinois this q day of t-:e15kQ A��/ , 2014. By: a%tn j Title STATE OF ILLINOIS ) ) SS. COUNTYOF <--k ) being duly sworn deposes and says that he is the of M&,u. Coo j& tA itt rand that the answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true and correct. SUBSCRIBED and sworn to before me pPF40\0.9 vo,.&%v®62 VtpQ pC����paesN N��m�sstpP v\ 1 a day of 2014. Page 2 I Notary Public �,, • �,»��� ..,. 5 %y.. GIf.:: Section G References Bidder shall supply the following information listing at least five customers for which the bidder has supplied a similar type of commodities, service, or construction: 1. Company Name: I -PRM ISH\tel eOV\S T Rvc.7 Kt� N Address: 3140 FttILE-11 RD. SutT� F DowNt✓RS GcHoue) tL- Phone#: Ca30• (-,)ILI.7ggO GogtS Contact: 71H LE-P?ERS 2. Company Name: AMA-2IN&t IZt✓-S-70RA71C�N� INC• Address:iIC73 �`�• ST. et+AR�Es 2D VILLHRq IL GOO Phone#: &3C7. Contact: G u CA C� c 3. Company Name: 7-RQC t.-10IZTtA l I-kQ -ST-t '1 7 S , I (iC- - Address: .30sDo�-- ScJ.I (= 3oa coz) L� Phone#: G3O.322 `i(00S E)+ 23G Contact: 7ipk�'D1 W R M -_- 4, E4. Company Name: <-- / SICF1��1� Address: -380 'Ml'kr AV E 1=LK GeZ2oVl✓ Vt- -, LL- F,00e)'7 Phone #: 7. 3�I 3 3 fog l I Contact: G erc \cam S ALS VG: N:�N O 5. Company Name: 7�OCK 1 Et"(y Address: 450 6. NOZTN AJE C RaoL STREAKI, L Gof 3g Phone#: Ca30 38'-I 513`7 I Contact: KnwsK l Page 1 Section G References Bidder shall supply the following information listing at least five customers for which the bidder has supplied a similar type of commodities, service, or construction: 1. Company Name: 1 I RM 1 PWA COVVS i RVCT1(�N Address: 3140 F111LE-`l Rn- SUITE F DowNERS GHoue, tL— ��StS Phone #: Co 3 O • (o 14. 7 q S(D Contact: 31M L -E- PI? 2. Company Name: )A,MA�tN(�t 2l STc�2ATll>N� ►tVC• Address: '403 W. ST. e RARLES 20 VILLA ?A2K� I L rocol8 � Phone #: Cc 3C�- 2 Co �3 g �iF70 Contact:�� GL d 3. Company Name: -TCZVC lVoC2T�i 11 Iy7LSTt��td S t l l�C Address: 3OcDo ©tR. s�.�c 3oa (ac�St� Phone#: (03� 3Z2 �(C7�$ E 23Co Contact:y� W flCTE 4. Company Name: tat—=N Address: -380 k' K-rA,,ua I=cK Ca2oV?✓ VLG-t 1L 600b"7 Phone #: &4�7' 3q 3 3 &L4 ( Contact: G ca.,z-\o S AGS \l 1✓ 00 5. Company Name: OCK I Et -4,(V Address: 450 E ltol2TN AQE C F 7POLSTRt✓AF' 1� G l$g . Phone#: (a3o- 38y' 5137 t Contact: vr MACK0WSK l Page 1 i v:4 "il Section I Contract Village of Oak Brook Fire Station #93 HVAC System Upgrade ++1 1. THIS AGREEMENT, made and concluded this �i day ofE � 2014, between the Village of Oak Brook, a municipal corporation, acting bypd through its President and Board of Trustees, known as VILLAGE, and 69tr66 M6LPN"r-21- his executors, administrators, successors or assigns, known as CONTRACTOR. 2. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements mentioned in the Bid hereto attached, to be made and performed by the VILLAGE, and according to the terms expressed in the Bond (if applicable) referring to these presents, the CONTRACTOR agrees, at their own proper cost and expense, to do all work, furnish all materials and all labor necessary to complete the work in accordance with the plans and specifications hereinafter described, and in full compliance with all of the terms of this Contract. 3. And it is also understood and agreed that the entire Bid Package hereto attached, approved by the VILLAGE this I1 *"'qday of Fsc3eoa2y 2014, are all essential documents of this contract and area part hereof. 4. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said parties have executed these presents on the above mentioned date. ATTEST: VILLAGE OF OAK BROOK y -- Village Clerk Village President ATTEST: G(ZoSSG KEc< Secretary Corporate Name By Contrac or Page 1 of lLLIRCAS� IKG. ¥�\©�� m/�� \ � ���\�:�'� _ \�� y w \�� % . . ������yyw::�� .� � , . � ���� � / » � � � [\ /� � � \\\� ^/ SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN TO before me this 19 thday ofFEBRyaRY , 201�i. Notary Public ATTEST: OFFICIAL6RESR NowtPublI&SLM22,2016 MY Commission Exp lfeb Page 2 Partners doing Business under the firm name of 011) Party of the Second Part (If a Co -Partnership) N I A (If an Individual) MU Party of the Second Part SEXUAL HARASSMENT CERTIFICATE l F-656 AEC.t#f} A AL &TF—kTbkS hereinafter referred to as "Contractor' having submitted a bid/proposal for FfP-C SLanoa #93 Ntk uP&,lzaP to the Village of Oak Brook, DuPage/Cook Counties, Illinois, hereby certifies that said Contractor has a written sexual harassment policy in place in full compliance with 775 ILCS 5/2-105(A)(4) including the following information: 1. An acknowledgment of the illegality of sexual harassment. 2. The definition of sexual harassment under State law. 3. A description of sexual harassment, utilizing examples. 4. The contractor's internal complaint process including penalties. 5. The legal recourse, investigative and complaint process available through the Illinois Department of Human Rights and the Human Rights Commission. 6. Directions on how to contact the Department or the Commission. 7. An acknowledgment of protection of a complaint against retaliation as provided in Section 6-101 of the Human Rights Act. Each contractor must provide a copy of such written policy to the Illinois Department of Human Rights upon request. By: Authorize ent of Contractor Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20_ OPFlCIN-SE�- vCKI VANI ER CK Noiary Pobl'�c •State of IIIIno2015 fyly Commission Explras Nov 22, Notary Pubic Page 3 C t day; 1..'. ; .. CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATIONS (CONTRACT EXECUTION) G �EUi�i1Sl �i ; h,4ving;e)kecuted.a•contract for 1116 with the VILLAGE, hereby certifies that said contractor is not barred from executing said contract as a result of a violation of either Section 5/33E-3 or 5/33E-4 of Chapter 720 of the Illinois Compiled Statutes. (DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE) Contractor deposes, states and certifies it will provide a drug free workplace by complying with Section 3 of the Illinois Drug Free Workplace Act, being 30 ILCS 580/3. Attest/Witness: L -P r_ Tt i Title: Subscribed and Sworn to before me this It> day of rA ARCH 201-1-. Notary Public Contract llllW By: I Name ontractor's Executing Officer R&J Ecl� Title: A WA -&C12__ Title of Contractor's Executing Officer M oFFlCw sEA6 VICKI VANDERBECK Notary Public -State of Illinois 11MY Commleelon Expires Nov 22, 2015 PREVAILING WAGE AFFIDAVIT Page 4 -SEAL- SEXUAL HARASSMENT CERTIFICATE 4655E &WA'L 6TQ!'-MR-$, hereinafter referredContractor" Wr having submitted a bid/proposal for ft" grpN *-`13 NV-- i tiP�°�d the Village of Oak Brook, DuPage/Cook Counties, Illinois, hereby certifies that said Contractor has a written sexual harassment policy in place in full compliance with 775 ILCS 5/2-105(A)(4) including the following information: 1. An acknowledgment of the illegality of sexual harassment. 2. The definition of sexual harassment under State law. 3. A description of sexual harassment, utilizing examples. 4. The contractor's internal complaint process including penalties. 5. The legal recourse, investigative and complaint process available through the Illinois Depart Ms is and the Human Rights Commission 6. Direction 1 "' Department or t �, 7. An acknosed'�jment of �3rs'tion of a complai t a ainsf�reaaon afs'ypr IAed in Section 6-101 of the Human Rights Act. Each contractor must provide a copy of such written policy to the Illinois Department of Human Rights upon request. Subscribed and sworn to before me this I& day of /HF} 20)%_. Notary Public By: Authorilf Agent of Contractor Page 3 Notary Public - state of Illinois My Commission Expires Nov 22, 2015 CERTIFICATION OF PAYROLL RECORDS (name of person execLi do hereby certify. that I am the duly alified and acting;F? ! tA►5 i(title) for �c CiCi19t�7C RL C6Nf`7Z?�me of contractor) and, as such, am authorized to certify payroll records as true and accurate for such company in accordance with the requirements of Section 5 of the Prevailing Wage Act (820 ILCS 130/5) (the "Act"). I do hereby further certify that the following document is a true and accurate copy of the records I fts, mechanics, and other wo ker em�l, y 25' Ac-r,!-iPYOC, �(nam�tractor) on the �it�C TT�T 4 ro�}�ct�t ie roject") for the Village of Oak Brook (the "Village"), including each such worker's name, address, telephone number, social security number, classification or classifications; and the hourly wages paid in each pay period, hours worked each day, and the starting and ending times of work each day for each such worker on such Project. I do hereby further certify that the hourly rate paid to each worker is not less than the general prevailing rate of RLgly wages required by the Act, and that a`iMT9 of contractor), and I on behalf of such contractor, are fully aware that filing a certified payroll that we know to be false is a Class B misdemeanor. I further certify that upon two (2) business days' notice, if requested, we and any subcontractor hired by us shall make available for inspection the records required in the Act to the District, its officers and agents, and to the Director of Labor, his deputies and agents, at reasonable hours at a location within the State of Illinois. Date:- ) ' 2014 q,6ZHWC ,,-L C s4 .4zTbiZS (Name of Contractor) (Signature) (Printed Name) &���� (Title) Subscribed and sworn to be re me this day of f"t 2014. MO ary"bl Page 6 OFM VICKI Notary Puis My Commissi015 6X I. (name of si n� o£'-o`n oafh ` g ry), Hstate and certify that ME0+l`UCjW— _ (name of Contractor), pursuant to a P 1 f Contract dated 3 % 2014, with ,the Village of Oak Brook for the f�C/ uR,eRizE ��A�n! Project, has complied and will comply with all laws, including those relating to the employment of labor, the payment of the current general prevailing rate of hourly wages for each craft or type of worker or mechanic needed to execute the Contract or perform such work, and also the current general prevailing rate for legal holiday and overtime work, as ascertained by the Illinois Department of Labor for DuPage County, Illinois, and those prevailing rates are paid and shall be paid for each craft or type of worker or mechanic needed to execute the aforesaid Contract or to perform such work. Cw�&e /1ewnm&Al' (name of Co actor) has also complied and will comply with all record keeping requirements established in the Prevailing Wage Act (820 ILCS 130/0.01, et seq.,.. CONTRACTOR: By: , � 7 Title: Y&aEZT dPrNP4'eZ SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN TO BEFORE M PrRCt 1 2014 7PUbfiofte ALVIECK AR C Notaryof111inote My Com Nnogo ome Page 5 FREfViUM SUBJECT TO ADJUSTMENT BASED ON FINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT performance thereof and until the said work shall have. been accepted, and shall hold VILLAGE harmless on account of any such damages and shall in all respects fully and faithfully comply with all the provisions, conditions, and requirements of said contract, then this obligation to be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, the said PRINCIPAL and the said SURETY have caused this instrument to be signed by their respective officers this 19th day of March 2014. PRINCIPAL Grosse Mechanical Contractors of IL, Inc. (Compa�� By: (Sig t re) President (Title) (Company Name) By: (Signature) (Title) (If PRINCIPAL is a joint venture of two or more contractors, the company names and authorized signatures of each contractor must be affixed.) Employers Mutual Casualty Company (Name of Surety) SURETY L (Signature of,Attorney in fact) Wimam'P. Maher Page 8 Section J Contract Bond Village of Oak Brook Fire Station #93 HVAC System Upgrade Bond # S423492 Subject to Adjustment Based on Final Contract Price We, Grosse Mechanical Contractors of IL; Inc:, �" INCIPAL, and Employers Mutual Casualty Company as SURETY, are held and firmly bound unto. the Village of Oak Brook (hereafter referred to as "VILLAGE") in the penal sum of One Hundred Seventy, Eight Thousand,Wne Hundred Dollars ($°178,900.00-------- lawful money of the United States, well and truly to be paid unto said VILLAGE, for the payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, jointly to pay to VILLAGE this sum under the conditionsof this instrument, WHEREAS THE CONDITION OF THE FOREGOING OBLIGATION IS SUCH that, the said Principal has entered into a written contract with the Village acting through its awarding authority for the above stated project, which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof, as if written herein at length, and whereby the said Principal has promised and agreed to Perform said work in accordance with the terms of said contract, including, bu term re Urrk? the Payment at the prevailing rate of hourly v✓eges tdmtsectto s of money due for any labor, materials, �^sct r r aoparatus, fiat r macliineiY Ul11 f6guch Principal for the purpose -of performing such work and has further agreed to pay all direct and indirect damages to any person, firm, company, or corporation_ suffered or sustained,on account_of the performance of,such work during the time thereof and until such work is completed and accepted, except as modified by the Guarantee section of the Bid; and has further agreed that this bond shall insure to the benefit of any person, firm, company or corporation, to whom any money may be due from the Principal, subcontractor or otherwise, for any such labor, materials, apparatus, fixtures or machinery so furnished and that suit may be maintained on such bond by any such person, firm, company, or corporation, for the recovery of any such money. NOW, THEREFORE, if the said Principal shall well and truly perform said work it accordance with the terms of said contract, and shall pay all sums of money due or to become due for any labor, materials, apparatus, fixtures or machinery furnished to him for the purpose of performing such work, and shall commence and complete the work within the time prescribed in said contract, and shall pay and discharge all damages, direct and indirect, that may suffered or sustained on account of such work during the time of the Daae 7 State of Illinois ) )SS' County of cook ) , a Notary Public in and for said county, do hereby certify that 6=MW (names of individuals signing on behalf of Principal and Surety) who are each personally known to me to be the same persons whose names are subscribed to the foregoing instrument on behalf of PRINCIPAL and SURETY, appeared before me this day in person and acknowledged respectively, that they signed and delivered said instrument as their free and voluntary act for the uses and purposes therein set forth. Given under my hand' and notarial seal this 19th day of " March 2014. Notary Public My commission expires: =STATE S NOTARILLINOISPAY COG/18117 Page 9 AVEMC INSURANCE P.O. Box 712 - Des Moines, IA 50306-0712 N0, A72529 CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORITY INDIVIDUAL ATTORNEY-IN-FACT KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that: 1. Employers Mutual Casualty Company, an Iowa Corporation 5. Dakota Fire Insurance Company, a North Dakota Corporation 2. EMCASCO Insurance Company, an Iowa Corporation 6, EMC Property & Casualty Company, an Iowa Corporation 3. Union Insurance Company of Providence, an Iowa Corporation 7, Hamilton Mutual Insurance Company, an Iowa Corporation 4. Illinois EMCASCO Insurance Company, an Iowa Corporation ; I hereinafter referred to severally as "Company" and collectively as "Companies", each does, by these presents, make, constitut. CARL DOHN JR, KAREN DOHN, WILLIAM P, MAHER, JEFFREY S. MOORE, JACQUELINE BRENNER, SUSAN MURRAY, VICKI L BROADOUS, ELISE SIEGEL - its We and lawful attorney-in-fact, with full power and authority conferred to sign, seal, and execute its lawful bonds, undertakings, and other obligatory instruments of a similar nature as follows: ANY AND ALL BONDS and to bind each Company thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such instruments were signed by the duly authorized officers of each such Company, and all of the acts of said attorney pursuanldo the authority, hereby given are hereby ratified and confirmed,, The authority hereby granted shall expire APRIL 1. 2016 unless sooner revoked R OF ATTORNEY This Power -of -Attorney is m a'"2nd executed pursuant to and by the authority of the following resolution of the Boards of Directors of each of the Companies at a regularly scheduled meeting of each company duly called and held in 1999: RESOLVED: The Presicent and Chief Executive Officer, any Vice President,,( h_eTreasurer and the Secretary of Employers Mutual Casualty Company shall have power and authority to (1) appoint attorneys -in -fact and authorize them to execute on behalf o(eaci `Company and attach the seal of the Company thereto, bonds and undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatorym the nature (hereof BMJ) to remove any such attorney-in-fact at anytime and revoke the power and authority given to him or her. Attorneys -in -fact shall have power and authority subiecI to thG terms and limitations of the power-of-attorney issued to them, to execute and deliver on behalf of the Company, and to attach the seal of the Company (hereto 'bends -_and undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such Inst ument executed by any such agomey m-fa_ct shall be fully and in all respects binding upon the Company.. Cecation as to the validity of any power of -attorney authotized herein node by an oifoer of Employers Mutual Casualty Company shall be fully and in all respects binding upon this Company. The facsimile or mechanically _mproduced sigpature of'such ;officer, y [ether made heretofore or hereafter, wherever appearing upon a certified copy of any power-of-attorney, of the Company, shall tie valid and -,binding upon the Companywith the same force and effect as though manually affixed. IN WITNESS THEREOF, the Companies have caused these presents to be signed far each by their officers as shown, and the Corporate seals to be hereto affixed this 26th day of JUNE .2013 Seals P10 11 p,n54R-.'O, :4E £ Ca:... ., p`p`jY gl pq0 WW o`:oa',,;F; dr, wvdy; oz So �oF�wi^o 9s SEAL;>; waZZ *,O'4A � � ,'o'�U ,• j.�ia. '�" ;PAP �` ` =5 SEAL ;._; �? SEAL T= yg SEAL Z Z �aUTUA(� ,,,,, n,,,, oll tio�MUTUq .41s� ® y s r> KATHY LYNN LOVERIDGE Commission. Number 780769 My Commission Expires mA °" October 10, 2016 �OrNES. 10�P Bruce G. Kelley, Chairman Michael Freer of Companies 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6; President Assistant Vice President of Company 1; Vice Chairman and On this 26th day of JUNE AD 2013 before mea Notary Public in and forthe State of Iowa, personally appeared Bruce G. Kelley and Michael Free], who, being by me duly swom, did say that they are, and are known to me to be the Chairman, President, Vice Chairman and CEO, and/or Assistant Vice President/Assistant Secretary, respectively, of each of The Companies above; that the seals affixed to this instrument are the seals of said corporations; that said instrument was signed and sealed on behalf of each of the Companies by authority of their respective Boards of Directors; and that the said Bruce G. Kelley and Michael Freel, as such officers, acknowledged the execution of said instrument to be the voluntary act and deed of each of the Companies. My Commission Expires October 10, 2016. ,ter - � y a iuA { 11ti? ✓1nka -(i/o , ) NotarOublic iK and for the Stale of Iowa CERTIFICATE I, James D. Clough, Vice President of the Companies, do hereby ceri]fy that the foregoing resolution of the Boards of Directors by each of the Companies, and this Power of Attorney issued pursuant thereto on JUNE 26 2013 on behalf of: CARL DOHN JR, KAREN DOHN, WILLIAM R MAHER, JEFFREY S. MOORE, JACQUELINE BRENNER, SUSAN MURRAY, VICKI L. BROADDUS, ELISE SIEGEL are true and correct and are still in full force and effect. In Testimony Wnere�f Ihhave subscribed my name and affixed the facsimile seal of each Company this I Cl ^ day of )Yid r c+ _1520—LA . Vice President